C5505 Data Manual

TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
TMS320C5505 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Check for Samples: TMS320C5505
1 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
1.1
Features
12
• High-Performance, Low-Power, TMS320C55x™
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
– 16.67-, 13.33-, 10-, 8.33-, 6.66-ns Instruction
Cycle Time
– 60-, 75-, 100-, 120-, 150-MHz Clock Rate
– One/Two Instructions Executed per Cycle
– Dual Multipliers [Up to 200, 240, or 300
Million Multiply-Accumulates per Second
(MMACS)]
– Two Arithmetic/Logic Units (ALUs)
– Three Internal Data/Operand Read Buses
and Two Internal Data/Operand Write Buses
– Software-Compatible With C55x Devices
– Industrial Temperature Devices Available
• 320K Bytes Zero-Wait State On-Chip RAM,
Composed of:
– 64K Bytes of Dual-Access RAM (DARAM),
8 Blocks of 4K x 16-Bit
– 256K Bytes of Single-Access RAM (SARAM),
32 Blocks of 4K x 16-Bit
• 128K Bytes of Zero Wait-State On-Chip ROM
(4 Blocks of 16K x 16-Bit)
• 4M x 16-Bit Maximum Addressable External
Memory Space (SDRAM/mSDRAM)
• 16-/8-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF) with
Glueless Interface to:
– 8-/16-Bit NAND Flash, 1- and 4-Bit ECC
– 8-/16-Bit NOR Flash
– Asynchronous Static RAM (SRAM)
– 16-bit SDRAM/mSDRAM (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, and
3.3-V)
• Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller
– Four DMA With 4 Channels Each (16Channels Total)
• Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
– One Selectable as a Watchdog and/or GP
• Two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)
Interfaces
• Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART)
• Serial-Port Interface (SPI) With Four ChipSelects
• Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C Bus™)
• Four Inter-IC Sound (I2S Bus™) for Data
Transport
• Device USB Port With Integrated 2.0 HighSpeed PHY that Supports:
– USB 2.0 Full- and High-Speed Device
• LCD Bridge With Asynchronous Interface
• Tightly-Coupled FFT Hardware Accelerator
• 10-Bit 4-Input Successive Approximation (SAR)
ADC
• Real-Time Clock (RTC) With Crystal Input, With
Separate Clock Domain and Power Supply
• Four Core Isolated Power Supply Domains:
Analog, RTC, CPU and Peripherals, and USB
• Four I/O Isolated Power Supply Domains: RTC
I/O, EMIF I/O, USB PHY, and DVDDIO
• One integrated LDO (ANA_LDO) to power DSP
PLL (VDDA_PLL) and 10-bit SAR ADC (VDDA_ANA)
• Low-Power S/W Programmable Phase-Locked
Loop (PLL) Clock Generator
• On-Chip ROM Bootloader (RBL) to Boot From
NAND Flash, NOR Flash, SPI EEPROM, SPI
Serial Flash or I2C EEPROM
• IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG)
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
• Up to 26 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
(Multiplexed With Other Device Functions)
• 196-Terminal Pb-Free Plastic BGA (Ball Grid
Array) (ZCH Suffix)
• 1.05-V Core (60 or 75 MHz), 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V,
or 3.3-V I/Os
• 1.3-V Core (100, 120 MHz), 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V,
or 3.3-V I/Os
• 1.4-V Core (150 MHz), 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V or 3.3V I/Os
1
2
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to
specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production
processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
1.2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.ti.com
Applications
Wireless Audio Devices (Headsets, Microphones, Speakerphones)
Echo Cancellation Headphones
Portable Medical Devices
Voice Applications
Industrial Controls
Fingerprint Biometrics
Software Defined Radio
1.3
Description
The device is a member of TI's TMS320C5000™ fixed-point Digital Signal Processor (DSP) product family
and is designed for low-power applications.
The fixed-point DSP is based on the TMS320C55x™ DSP generation CPU processor core. The C55x™
DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power through increased parallelism and total focus
on power savings. The CPU supports an internal bus structure that is composed of one program bus, one
32-bit data read bus and two 16-bit data read buses, two 16-bit data write buses, and additional buses
dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the ability to perform up to four 16-bit data
reads and two 16-bit data writes in a single cycle. The device also includes four DMA controllers, each
with 4 channels, providing data movement for 16-independent channel contexts without CPU intervention.
Each DMA controller can perform one 32-bit data transfer per cycle, in parallel and independent of the
CPU activity.
The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit
multiplication and a 32-bit add in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by
an additional 16-bit ALU. Use of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize
parallel activity and power consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data
Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU.
The C55x CPU supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The Instruction
Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory and queues instructions for the
Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit decodes the instructions, directs tasks to the Address Unit (AU) and
Data Unit (DU) resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline. Predictive branching capability avoids
pipeline flushes on execution of conditional instructions.
The general-purpose input and output functions along with the 10-bit SAR ADC provide sufficient pins for
status, interrupts, and bit I/O for LCD displays, keyboards, and media interfaces. Serial media is supported
through two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) peripherals, four Inter-IC Sound (I2S Bus™)
modules, one Serial-Port Interface (SPI) with up to 4 chip selects, one I2C multi-master and slave
interface, and a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) interface.
The device peripheral set includes an external memory interface (EMIF) that provides glueless access to
asynchronous memories like EPROM, NOR, NAND, and SRAM, as well as to high-speed, high-density
memories such as synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) and mobile SDRAM (mSDRAM). Additional peripherals
include: a high-speed Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0) device mode only, and a real-time clock (RTC). This
device also includes three general-purpose timers with one configurable as a watchdog timer, and an
analog phase-locked loop (APLL) clock generator.
In addition, the device includes a tightly-coupled FFT Hardware Accelerator. The tightly-coupled FFT
Hardware Accelerator supports 8 to 1024-point (in power of 2) real and complex-valued FFTs.
The device includes one integrated LDO (ANA_LDO) to provide regulated 1.3 V to the DSP PLL
(VDDA_PLL) and 10-bit SAR ADC(VDDA_ANA). Note: ANA_LDO can only provide a regulated 1.3 V. When the
DSP PLL requires 1.4 V (PLLOUT > 120 MHz), an external supply is required to supply 1.4 V to the DSP
PLL (VDDA_PLL).
2
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
The device is supported by the industry’s award-winning eXpressDSP™, Code Composer Studio™
Integrated Development Environment (IDE), DSP/BIOS™, Texas Instruments’ algorithm standard, and the
industry’s largest third-party network. Code Composer Studio IDE features code generation tools including
a C Compiler and Linker, RTDX™, XDS100™, XDS510™, XDS560™ emulation device drivers, and
evaluation modules. The device is also supported by the C55x DSP Library which features more than 50
foundational software kernels (FIR filters, IIR filters, FFTs, and various math functions) as well as chip
support libraries.
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
3
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
1.4
www.ti.com
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the device.
DSP System
Input
Clock(s)
JTAG Interface
C55x™ DSP CPU
PLL/Clock
Generator
FFT Hardware
Accelerator
Power
Management
64 KB DARAM
Pin
Multiplexing
256 KB SARAM
128 KB ROM
Switched Central Resource (SCR)
Peripherals
Interconnect
DMA
(x4)
Program/Data Storage
Serial Interfaces
I2S
(x4)
I2C
SPI
App-Spec
Display
Connectivity
10-Bit
SAR
ADC
LCD
Bridge
USB 2.0
PHY (HS)
[DEVICE]
NAND, NOR,
SRAM,
SDRAM/mSDRAM
UART
MMC/SD
(x2)
System
RTC
GP Timer
(x2)
GP Timer
or WD
LDO
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram
4
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
............... 1
............................................. 1
1.2
Applications .......................................... 2
1.3
Description ........................................... 2
1.4
Functional Block Diagram ........................... 4
Revision History .............................................. 6
2 Device Overview ........................................ 8
2.1
Device Characteristics ............................... 8
2.2
C55x CPU .......................................... 10
2.3
Memory Map Summary ............................ 14
2.4
Pin Assignments .................................... 15
2.5
Terminal Functions ................................. 16
3 Device Configuration ................................. 49
3.1
System Registers ................................... 49
3.2
Power Considerations .............................. 50
3.3
Clock Considerations ............................... 51
3.4
Boot Sequence ..................................... 53
3.5
Configurations at Reset ............................ 56
3.6
Configurations After Reset ......................... 56
3.7
Multiplexed Pin Configurations ..................... 59
3.8
Debugging Considerations ......................... 63
4 Device Operating Conditions ....................... 65
1
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
1.1
5
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ............................................ 70
5.3
5.4
Power Supplies ..................................... 71
External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and
USB_MXI Pins ...................................... 74
5.5
......................................... 78
........... 81
Reset ............................................... 82
Interrupts and XF ................................... 84
External Memory Interface (EMIF) ................. 86
Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) ....... 101
Real-Time Clock (RTC) ........................... 106
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ...................... 110
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
4.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case
Temperature Range (Unless Otherwise Noted) .... 65
6
4.2
4.3
Recommended Operating Conditions .............. 66
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ........... 67
7
Peripheral Information and Electrical
Specifications .......................................... 70
5.1
5.2
Features
Parameter Information
..............................
Clock PLLs
Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) ............................................ 114
...............................
.........
5.16 10-Bit SAR ADC ...................................
5.17 Serial Port Interface (SPI) .........................
5.18 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 Controller ........
5.19 General-Purpose Timers ..........................
5.20 General-Purpose Input/Output ....................
5.21 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG ................................
Device and Documentation Support .............
6.1
Device Support ....................................
6.2
Community Resources ............................
5.14
Inter-IC Sound (I2S)
116
5.15
Liquid Crystal Display Controller (LCDC)
123
132
133
136
143
145
149
151
151
152
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable
Information ............................................ 153
7.1
Thermal Data for ZCH
7.2
Packaging Information
............................
............................
153
153
70
Contents
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
5
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Revision History
NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.
This data manual revision history highlights the technical changes made to the device-specific data
manual.
Scope: Applicable updates to the TMS320C5000 device family, specifically relating to the device (Silicon
Revisions 2.0) which is now in the production data (PD) stage of development have been incorporated.
• 1.4-V Digital Core Voltage Supply at 150 MHz is now supported
SEE
ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS
Global
•
Section 2
Device Overview
Table 2-1, Characteristics of the C5505 Processor:
•
Deleted Power Characterization
•
Updated addresses for MMC/SD0 and MMC/SD1 in Table 2-4, Peripheral I/O-Space Control
Registers.
Section 2.5
Terminal Functions
Table 2-7, RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions:
•
Deleted duplicate note on board design guidelines.
Added notes to clarify that CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power supply and
none of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC.
Table 2-8, External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions:
•
Changed note for 16-bit asynchronous memory to connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins
[21:1].
Table 2-13, USB2.0 Terminal Functions
•
Added power-on information for USB_VBUS, USB_VDDA3P3, USB_VDDA1P3, and USB_VDD1P3.
Table 2-20, Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions:
•
Updated RSV16 description to tie directly to VSS.
Section 3
Device Configuration
•
Added note stating Device ID registers are reserved.
Section 3.4, Boot Sequence:
•
Added steps to set register configuration and copy boot image sections (steps 15 and 16).
•
Changed Figure 3-1, Bootloader Software Architecture.
•
Added reset default to pin multiplexing tables.
Section 4
Device Operating
Conditions
Section 4.1
•
Updated Device Operating Life Power-On Hours (POH) to 80,000 and 34,000.
Section 4.3
•
Added note for core (CVDD) supply power (P).
•
Updated ESD Stress Voltage value for HBM to > 1000 V.
6
Section 5.3
Power Supplies
•
Section 5.5.1
PLL Device-Specific
Information
Table 5-3, PLL Clock Frequency Ranges:
•
Updated maximum value for PLL_LOCKTIME.
Updated Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing.
Contents
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
SEE
Section 5.8.2
Wake-Up From IDLE
Electrical Data/Timing
ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS
Table 5-8, Timing Requirements for Wake-Up From IDLE:
•
Changed minimum value to 30.5 µs from 10 ns.
Table 5-9, Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For Wake-Up From
IDLE:
•
Changed parameter description to, "Delay time, WAKEUP pulse complete to CPU active."
•
Moved 2 to WAKEUP pulse complete from wake-up event high in Figure 5-13, Wake-Up From
IDLE Timings.
Section 5.9
External Memory
Interface (EMIF)
Global:
•
Updated device limitations on EM_SDCLK when DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V and 1.3 V.
•
Added notes to timing and switching tables.
Section 5.11
Real-Time Clock (RTC)
•
•
Section 6
Device and
Documentation Support
Moved documentation support to Section 7 from Section 3.6 and 3.7.
Added to wake-up sequence in Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode.
Updated reset value for WU_DOUT from 0 to 1.
Contents
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
7
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
2 Device Overview
2.1
Device Characteristics
Table 2-1, provides an overview of the TMS320C5505 DSP. The tables show significant features of the
device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package type
with pin count. For more detailed information on the actual device part number and maximum device
operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature.
Table 2-1. Characteristics of the C5505 Processor
HARDWARE FEATURES
C5505
Peripherals
Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width) SRAM,
Flash (NOR, NAND),
SDRAM and Mobile SDRAM (16-bit bus width) (1)
External Memory Interface (EMIF)
Not all peripheral pins are
available at the same time
(for more detail, see the
DMA
Device Configuration
section).
Four DMA controllers each with four channels,
for a total of 16 channels
Timers
2 32-Bit General-Purpose (GP) Timers
1 Additional Timer Configurable as a 32-Bit GP Timer and/or a
Watchdog
UART
1 (with RTS/CTS flow control)
SPI
1 with 4 chip selects
I2C
1 (Master/Slave)
2
4 (Two Channel, Full Duplex Communication)
I S
USB 2.0 (Device only)
High- and Full-Speed Device
2 MMC/SD, 256 byte read/write buffer, max 50-MHz clock for
SD cards, and signaling for DMA transfers
MMC/SD
LCD Bridge
1 (8-bit or 16-bit asynchronous parallel bus)
ADC (Successive Approximation [SAR])
1 (10-bit, 4-input, 16-μs conversion time)
Real-Time Clock (RTC)
1 (Crystal Input, Separate Clock Domain and Power Supply)
FFT Hardware Accelerator
1 (Supports 8 to 1024-point 16-bit real and complex FFT)
Up to 26 pins (with 1 Additional General-Purpose Output (XF)
and 4 Special-Purpose Outputs for Use With SAR)
General-Purpose Input/Output Port (GPIO)
Size (Bytes)
On-Chip Memory
320KB RAM, 128KB ROM
•
•
•
Organization
JTAG BSDL_ID
JTAGID Register
(Value is: 0x1B8F E02F)
CPU Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
ns
64KB On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)
256KB On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM)
128KB On-Chip Single-Access ROM (SAROM)
see Figure 5-44
1.05-V Core
60 or 75 MHz
1.3-V Core
100 or 120 MHz
1.4-V Core
150 MHz
1.05-V Core
16.67, 13.3 ns
1.3-V Core
10, 8.33 ns
1.4-V Core
6.66 ns
1.05 V (60, 75 MHz)
Voltage
Core (V)
1.3 V (100, 120 MHz)
1.4 V (150 MHz)
I/O (V)
1.8 V, 2.5 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V
1.3 V, 4 mA max current for PLL (VDDA_PLL), SAR, and power
management circuits (VDDA_ANA)
LDO
ANA_LDO
PLL Options
Software Programmable Multiplier
BGA Package
10 x 10 mm
(1)
8
x4 to x4099 multiplier
196-Pin BGA (ZCH)
For more information on SDRAM devices support, see Section 5.9, External Memory Interface (EMIF).
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-1. Characteristics of the C5505 Processor (continued)
HARDWARE FEATURES
C5505
Process Technology
μm
Product Status (2)
Product Preview (PP),
Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
(2)
0.09 μm
PD(All other device speeds)
PP (150-MHz devices)
PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns experimental products (designated as TMX) that are in the formative or design phase of
development. Characteristic data and other specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or
discontinue these products without notice.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
9
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.2
www.ti.com
C55x CPU
The TMS320C5505 fixed-point digital signal processor (DSP) is based on the C55x CPU 3.3 generation
processor core. The C55x DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power through increased
parallelism and total focus on power savings. The CPU supports an internal bus structure that is
composed of one program bus, three data read buses (one 32-bit data read bus and two 16-bit data read
buses), two 16-bit data write buses, and additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These
buses provide the ability to perform up to four data reads and two data writes in a single cycle. Each DMA
controller can perform one 32-bit data transfer per cycle, in parallel and independent of the CPU activity.
The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit
multiplication in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by an additional 16bit ALU. Use of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize parallel activity
and power consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) of
the C55x CPU.
The C55x DSP generation supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The
Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory, stores them in a
128-byte Instruction Buffer Queue, and queues instructions for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit
decodes the instructions, directs tasks to AU and DU resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline.
Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline flushes on execution of conditional instruction calls.
For more detailed information on the CPU, see the TMS320C55x CPU 3.0 CPU Reference Guide
(literature number SWPU073).
The C55x core of the device can address 16M bytes of unified data and program space. It also addresses
64K words of I/O space and includes three types of on-chip memory: 128 KB read-only memory (ROM),
256 KB single-access random access memory (SARAM), 64 KB dual-access random access memory
(DARAM). The memory map is shown in Figure 2-1.
2.2.1
On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)
The DARAM is located in the byte address range 000000h − 00FFFFh and is composed of eight blocks of
4K words each (see Table 2-2). Each DARAM block can perform two accesses per cycle (two reads, two
writes, or a read and a write). The DARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses.
Table 2-2. DARAM Blocks
(1)
10
CPU
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
DMA CONTROLLER
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
MEMORY BLOCK
000000h – 001FFFh
0001 0000h – 0001 1FFFh
DARAM 0 (1)
002000h – 003FFFh
0001 2000h – 0001 3FFFh
DARAM 1
004000h – 005FFFh
0001 4000h – 0001 5FFFh
DARAM 2
006000h – 007FFFh
0001 6000h – 0001 7FFFh
DARAM 3
008000h – 009FFFh
0001 8000h – 0001 9FFFh
DARAM 4
00A000h – 00BFFFh
0001 A000h – 0001 BFFFh
DARAM 5
00C000h – 00DFFFh
0001 C000h – 0001 DFFFh
DARAM 6
00E000h – 00FFFFh
0001 E000h – 0001 FFFFh
DARAM 7
The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs). See Figure 2-1, Memory Map
Summary.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.2.2
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM)
The SARAM is located at the byte address range 010000h – 04FFFFh and is composed of 32 blocks of
4K words each (see Table 2-3). Each SARAM block can perform one access per cycle (one read or one
write). SARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses. SARAM is also accessed
by the USB and LCD DMA buses.
Table 2-3. SARAM Blocks
(1)
2.2.3
CPU
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
DMA/USB CONTROLLER
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE
MEMORY BLOCK
010000h − 011FFFh
0009 0000h – 0009 1FFFh
SARAM 0
012000h − 013FFFh
0009 2000h – 0009 3FFFh
SARAM 1
014000h − 015FFFh
0009 4000h – 0009 5FFFh
SARAM 2
016000h − 017FFFh
0009 6000h – 0009 7FFFh
SARAM 3
018000h − 019FFFh
0009 8000h – 0009 9FFFh
SARAM 4
01A000h − 01BFFFh
0009 A000h – 0009 BFFFh
SARAM 5
01C000h − 01DFFFh
0009 C000h – 0009 DFFFh
SARAM 6
01E000h − 01FFFFh
0009 E000h – 0009 FFFFh
SARAM 7
020000h − 021FFFh
000A 0000h – 000A 1FFFh
SARAM 8
022000h − 023FFFh
000A 2000h – 000A 3FFFh
SARAM 9
024000h − 025FFFh
000A 4000h – 000A 5FFFh
SARAM 10
026000h − 027FFFh
000A 6000h – 000A 7FFFh
SARAM 11
028000h − 029FFFh
000A 8000h – 000A 9FFFh
SARAM 12
02A000h − 02BFFFh
000A A000h – 000A BFFFh
SARAM 13
02C000h − 02DFFFh
000A C000h – 000A DFFFh
SARAM 14
02E000h − 02FFFFh
000A E000h – 000A FFFFh
SARAM 15
030000h − 031FFFh
000B 0000h – 000B 1FFFh
SARAM 16
032000h − 033FFFh
000B 2000h – 000B 3FFFh
SARAM 17
034000h − 035FFFh
000B 4000h – 000B 5FFFh
SARAM 18
036000h − 037FFFh
000B 6000h – 000B 7FFFh
SARAM 19
038000h − 039FFFh
000B 8000h – 000B 9FFFh
SARAM 20
03A000h − 03BFFFh
000B A000h – 000B BFFFh
SARAM 21
03C000h − 03DFFFh
000B C000h – 000B DFFFh
SARAM 22
03E000h − 03FFFFh
000B E000h – 000B FFFFh
SARAM 23
040000h – 041FFFh
000C 0000h – 000C 1FFFh
SARAM 24
042000h – 043FFFh
000C 2000h – 000C 3FFFh
SARAM 25
044000h – 045FFFh
000C 4000h – 000C 5FFFh
SARAM 26
046000h – 047FFFh
000C 6000h – 000C 7FFFh
SARAM 27
048000h – 049FFFh
000C 8000h – 000C 9FFFh
SARAM 28
04A000h – 04BFFFh
000C A000h – 000C BFFFh
SARAM 29
04C000h – 04DFFFh
000C C000h – 000C DFFFh
SARAM 30
04E000h – 04FFFFh
000C E000h – 000C FFFFh
SARAM 31 (1)
SARAM31 (byte address range: 0x4E000 – 0x4EFFF) is reserved for the bootloader. After the boot
process is complete, this memory space can be used.
On-Chip Read-Only Memory (ROM)
The zero-wait-state ROM is located at the byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh. The ROM is
composed of four 16K-word blocks, for a total of 128K bytes of ROM. The ROM address space can be
mapped by software to the external memory or to the internal ROM.
The standard device includes a Bootloader program resident in the ROM.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
11
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status register is cleared (by default), the byte address range
FE0000h – FFFFFFh is reserved for the on-chip ROM. When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status
register is set through software, the on-chip ROM is disabled and not present in the memory map, and
byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh is unmapped. A hardware reset always clears the MPNMC bit,
so it is not possible to disable the ROM at reset. However, the software reset instruction does not affect
the MPNMC bit. The ROM can be accessed by the program and data buses. Each on-chip ROM block is
a one cycle per word access memory.
2.2.4
External Memory
The external memory space of the device is located at the byte address range 050000h – FFFFFFh. The
external memory space is divided into five chip select spaces: one dedicated to SDRAM and mobile
SDRAM (EMIF CS0 or CS[1:0] space), and the remainder (EMIF CS2 through CS5 space) dedicated to
asynchronous devices including flash. Each chip select space has a corresponding chip select pin (called
EM_CSx) that is activated during an access to the chip select space.
The external memory interface (EMIF) provides the means for the DSP to access external memories and
other devices including: mobile single data rate (SDR) synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM and
mSDRAM), NOR Flash, NAND Flash, and asynchronous static RAM (SRAM). Before accessing external
memory, you must configure the EMIF through its memory-mapped registers.
The EMIF provides a configurable 16- or 8-bit data bus, an address bus width of up to 21-bits, and 5
dedicated chip selects, along with memory control signals. To maximize power savings, the I/O pins of the
EMIF can be operated at an independent voltage from the other I/O pins on the device.
2.2.5
I/O Memory
The device includes a 64K byte I/O space for the memory-mapped registers of the DSP peripherals and
system registers used for idle control, status monitoring and system configuration. I/O space is separate
from program/memory space and is accessed with separate instruction opcodes or via the DMA's.
Table 2-4 lists the memory-mapped registers of the device. Note that not all addresses in the 64K byte I/O
space are used; these addresses should be treated as RESERVED and not accessed by the CPU nor
DMA. For the expanded tables of each peripheral, see Section 5, Peripheral Information and Electrical
Specifications of this document.
Some of the DMA controllers have access to the I/O-Space memory-mapped registers of the following
peripherals registers: I2C, UART, I2S, MMC/SD, EMIF, USB, and SAR ADC.
Before accessing any peripheral memory-mapped register, make sure the peripheral being accessed is
not held in reset via the Peripheral Reset Control Register (PRCR) and its internal clock is enabled via the
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2).
12
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-4. Peripheral I/O-Space Control Registers
WORD ADDRESS
PERIPHERAL
0x0000 – 0x0004
Idle Control
0x0005 – 0x000D through 0x0803 – 0x0BFF
Reserved
0x0C00 – 0x0C7F
DMA0
0x0C80 – 0x0CFF
Reserved
0x0D00 – 0x0D7F
DMA1
0x0D80 – 0x0DFF
Reserved
0x0E00 – 0x0E7F
DMA2
0x0E80 – 0x0EFF
Reserved
0x0F00 – 0x0F7F
DMA3
0x0F80 – 0x0FFF
Reserved
0x1000 – 0x10DD
EMIF
0x10EE – 0x10FF through 0x1300 – 0x17FF
Reserved
0x1800 – 0x181F
Timer0
0x1820 – 0x183F
Reserved
0x1840 – 0x185F
Timer1
0x1860 – 0x187F
Reserved
0x1880 – 0x189F
Timer2
0x1900 – 0x197F
RTC
0x1980 – 0x19FF
Reserved
0x1A00 – 0x1A6C
I2C
0x1A6D – 0x1AFF
Reserved
0x1B00 – 0x1B1F
UART
0x1B80 – 0x1BFF
Reserved
0x1C00 – 0x1CFF
System Control
0x1D00 – 0x1FFF through 0x2600 – 0x27FF
Reserved
0x2800 – 0x2840
I2S0
0x2900 – 0x2940
I2S1
0x2A00 – 0x2A40
I2S2
0x2B00 – 0x2B40
I2S3
0x2C41 – 0x2DFF
Reserved
0x2E00 – 0x2E40
LCD
0x2E41 – 0x2FFF
Reserved
0x3000 – 0x300F
SPI
0x3010 – 0x39FF
Reserved
0x3A00 – 0x3A7F
MMC/SD0
0x3A80 – 0x3AFF
Reserved
0x3B00 – 0x3B7F
MMC/SD1
0x3B80 – 0x6FFF
Reserved
0x7000 – 0x70FF
SAR and Analog Control Registers
0x7100 – 0x7FFF
Reserved
0x8000 – 0xFFFF
USB
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
13
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.3
www.ti.com
Memory Map Summary
The device provides 16M bytes of total memory space composed of on-chip RAM, on-chip ROM, and
external memory space supporting a variety of memory types. The on-chip, dual-access RAM allows two
accesses to a given block during the same cycle. There are 8 blocks of 8K bytes of dual-access RAM.
The on-chip, single-access RAM allows one access to a given block per cycle. In addition, there are 32
blocks of 8K bytes of single-access RAM.
The remainder of the memory map is divided into five external spaces, and on-chip ROM. Each external
space has a chip select decode signal (called EM_CS0, EM_CS[2:5]) that indicates an access to the
selected space. The external memory interface (EMIF) supports access to asynchronous memories such
as SRAM, NAND, or NOR and Flash, and mobile single data rate (mSDR) and single data rate (SDR)
SDRAM.
The DSP memory is accessible by different master modules within the DSP, including the C55x CPU, the
four DMA controllers, LCD, and the CDMA of USB (see Figure 2-1).
CPU BYTE
DMA/USB/LCD
ADDRESS(A)
BYTE ADDRESS(A)
000000h
0001 0000h
0000C0h
0001 00C0h
MEMORY BLOCKS
MMR (Reserved)
DARAM
010000h
(B)
(D)
64K Minus 192 Bytes
0009 0000h
256K Bytes
SARAM
050000h
0100 0000h
External-CS0 Space
800000h
C00000h
E00000h
F00000h
FE0000h
FFFFFFh
(C)(E)
8M Minus 320K Bytes SDRAM/mSDRAM
0200 0000h
External-CS2 Space
(C)
External-CS3 Space
(C)
2M Bytes Asynchronous
External-CS4 Space
(C)
1M Bytes Asynchronous
External-CS5 Space
(C)
1M Minus 128K Bytes Asynchronous
4M Bytes Asynchronous
0300 0000h
0400 0000h
0500 0000h
050E 0000h
ROM
(if MPNMC=0)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
BLOCK SIZE
Reserved
(if MPNMC=1)
Unmapped (if MPNMC=1)
128K Bytes ROM (if MPNMC=0)
050F FFFFh
Address shown represents the first byte address in each block.
The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs).
Reading/Writing to/from unmapped returns zeros.
The USB and LCD controllers do not have access to DARAM.
The CS0 space can be accessed by CS0 only or by CS0 and CS1.
Figure 2-1. Memory Map Summary
14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.4
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Pin Assignments
Extensive pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in the
smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using software programmable register settings.
For more information on pin muxing, see Section 3.7, Multiplexed Pin Configurations of this document.
2.4.1
Pin Map (Bottom View)
Figure 2-2 shows the bottom view of the package pin assignments.
P
EM_DQM1
DVDDEMIF
DVDDIO
LCD_
CS0_E0/
SPI_CS0
LCD_
RW_WRB/
SPI_CS2
LCD_D[0]/
SPI_RX
LCD_D[2]/
GP[12]
DVDDIO
LCD_D[5]/
GP[15]
LCD_D[7]/
GP[17]
LCD_D[9]/
I2S2_FS/
GP[19]/
SPI_CS0
LCD_D[11]/
I2S2_DX/
GP[27]/
SPI_TX
LCD_D[13]/
UART_CTS/
GP[29]/
I2S3_FS
LCD_D[15]/
UART_TXD/
GP[31]/
I2S3_DX
N
EM_A[15]/
GP[21]
EM_SDCKE
LCD_
EN_RDB/
SPI_CLK
LCD_
CS1_EN1/
SPI_CS1
LCD_RS/
SPI_CS3
LCD_D[1]/
SPI_TX
LCD_D[3]/
GP[13]
LCD_D[4]/
GP[14]
LCD_D[6]/
GP[16]
LCD_D[8]/
I2S2_CLK/
GP[18]/
SPI_CLK
LCD_D[10]/
I2S2_RX/
GP[20]/
SPI_RX
LCD_D[12]/
UART_RTS/
GP[28]/
I2S3_CLK
LCD_D[14]/
UART_RXD/
GP[30]/
I2S3_RX
DVDDIO
M
EM_A[14]
EM_D[5]
EM_SDCLK
EM_CS3
EMU1
TCK
TDO
XF
TRST
MMC0_D1/
I2S0_RX/
GP[3]
MMC0_CMD/
I2S0_FS/
GP[1]
MMC1_D1/
I2S1_RX/
GP[9]
MMC1_CLK/
I2S1_CLK/
GP[6]
MMC1_D0/
I2S1_DX/
GP[8]
L
EM_A[13]
EM_A[10]
EM_D[12]
EM_D[4]
CVDD
EMU0
TDI
TMS
MMC0_D0/
I2S0_DX/
GP[2]
MMC0_CLK/
I2S0_CLK/
GP[0]
MMC0_D3/
GP[5]
MMC0_D2/
GP[4]
MMC1_D3/
GP[11]
MMC1_CMD/
I2S1_FS/
GP[7]
K
EM_A[12]/
(CLE)
EM_A[11]/
(ALE)
EM_D[14]
EM_D[13]
EM_D[6]
EM_WAIT3
DVDDIO
VSS
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDDIO
VSS
MMC1_D2/
GP[10]
J
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[20]/
GP[26]
EM_D[15]
DVDDEMIF
CVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
RSV1
RSV2
USB_VBUS
USB_VDD1P3
USB_DM
H
EM_WE
EM_A[7]
EM_D[7]
EM_WAIT5
DVDDEMIF
VSS
DVDDEMIF
CVDD
USB_
VSSA1P3
USB_
VDDA1P3
USB_
VSSA3P3
USB_
VDDA3P3
USB_VSS1P3
USB_DP
G
EM_WAIT4
EM_A[18]/
GP[24]
EM_D[0]
EM_A[19]/
GP[25]
DVDDEMIF
VSS
VSS
USB_VDDPLL
USB_R1
USB_VSSREF USB_VSSPLL USB_VDDOSC
USB_MXI
USB_MXO
F
EM_A[6]
EM_A[17]/
GP[23]
EM_D[2]
EM_D[9]
DVDDEMIF
CVDD
DVDDIO
DVDDRTC
VSS
VSS
USB_VSSOSC
USB_LDOO
LDOI
LDOI
E
EM_A[2]
EM_A[16]/
GP[22]
EM_D[8]
EM_OE
EM_D[1]
DVDDEMIF
INT1
WAKEUP
VSS
DSP_LDOO
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
D
EM_A[5]
EM_A[3]
EM_D[10]
EM_D[3]
EM_WAIT2
RESET
VSS
RTC_
CLKOUT
VSSA_PLL
GPAIN0
VSS
DSP_
LDO_EN
RSV16
RSV3
C
EM_A[4]
EM_A[1]
EM_CS4
EM_D[11]
EM_CS2
INT0
CLK_SEL
CVDDRTC
VSSRTC
VDDA_PLL
GPAIN3
RSV0
RSV5
RSV4
B
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_CS0
EM_SDCAS
EM_DQM0
EM_R/W
SCL
SDA
RTC_XI
VSSA_ANA
GPAIN2
LDOI
BG_CAP
VSSA_ANA
A
EM_BA[0]
DVDDEMIF
EM_CS5
EM_CS1
DVDDEMIF
EM_SDRAS
CLKOUT
CLKIN
RTC_XO
VDDA_ANA
GPAIN1
ANA_LDOO
VSS
VSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A.
Shading denotes pins not supported on this device. To ensure proper device operation, these pins must be hooked
up properly, see Table 2-19, Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions.
Figure 2-2. Pin Map(A)
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
15
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5
www.ti.com
Terminal Functions
The terminal functions tables (Table 2-5 through Table 2-22) identify the external signal names, the
associated pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin
has any internal pullup or pulldown resistors or bus-holders, and a functional pin description. For more
detailed information on device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging
considerations, see Section 3, Device Configuration.
For proper device operation, external pullup/pulldown resistors may be required on some pins.
Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors, discusses situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors
are required.
16
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.5.1
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Oscillator and PLL Terminal Functions
Table 2-5. Oscillator and PLL Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
DSP clock output signal. For debug purposes, the CLKOUT pin can be used to tap
different clocks within the system clock generator. The SRC bits in the CLKOUT
Control Source Register (CCSSR) can be used to specify the CLKOUT pin source.
Additionally, the slew rate of the CLKOUT pin can be controlled by the Output
Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [0x1C16].
CLKOUT
A7
O/Z
–
DVDDIO
BH
The CLKOUT pin is enabled/disabled through the CLKOFF bit in the CPU ST3_55
register. When disabled, the CLKOUT pin is placed in high-impedance (Hi-Z). At
reset the CLKOUT pin is enabled until the beginning of the boot sequence, when
the on-chip Bootloader sets CLKOFF = 1 and the CLKOUT pin is disabled (Hi-Z).
For more information on the ST3_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU
Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073).
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
Input clock. This signal is used to input an external clock when the 32-KHz on-chip
oscillator is not used as the DSP clock (pin CLK_SEL = 1). For boot purposes, the
CLKIN frequency is assumed to be either 11.2896, 12, or 12.288 MHz.
The CLK_SEL pin (C7) selects between the 32-KHz crystal clock or CLKIN.
CLKIN
A8
I
–
DVDDIO
BH
When the CLK_SEL pin is low, this pin should be tied to ground (VSS). When
CLK_SEL is high, this pin should be driven by an external clock source.
If CLK_SEL is high, this pin is used as the reference clock for the clock generator
and during bootup the bootloader bypasses the PLL and assumes the CLKIN
frequency is one of the following frequencies: 11.2896-, 12-, or 12.288-MHz. With
these frequencies in mind, the bootloader sets the SPI clock rates at 500 KHz and
the I2C clock rate at 400 KHz.
Clock input select. This pin selects between the 32-KHz crystal clock or CLKIN.
CLK_SEL
C7
I
–
DVDDIO
BH
0 = 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives the RTC timer and the system clock generator
while CLKIN is ignored.
1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator and the 32-KHz on-chip oscillator
drives only the RTC timer.
This pin is not allowed to change during device operation; it must be tied high or
low at the board.
1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT ≤ 120
MHz).
VDDA_PLL
C10
PWR
see Section 4.2, This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin.
ROC
1.4-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT > 120
MHz).
Note: When VDDA_PLL requires 1.4V, VDDA_PLL must be powered externally.
VSSA_PLL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
D9
GND
see Section 4.2,
Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator.
ROC
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
17
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.2
www.ti.com
RTC Terminal Functions
Table 2-6. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Real-time clock oscillator output. This pin operates at the RTC core voltage,
CVDDRTC, and supports a 32.768-kHz crystal.
RTC_XO
A9
O/Z
–
CVDDRTC
If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to
CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to floating or grounded. A voltage must still be applied to
CVDDRTC by an external power source (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating
Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC.
Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range
1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible.
Real-time clock oscillator input.
RTC_XI
B9
I
–
CVDDRTC
If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to
CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground (VSS). A voltage must still be applied to CVDDRTC
by an external power source (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating
Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC.
Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range
1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible.
RTC_CLKOUT
D8
O/Z
WAKEUP
E8
I/O/Z
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
18
–
DVDDRTC
–
DVDDRTC
Real-time clock output pin. This pin operates at DVDDRTC voltage. The
RTC_CLKOUT pin is enabled/disabled through the RTCCLKOUTEN bit in the RTC
Power Management Register (RTCPMGT). At reset, the RTC_CLKOUT pin is
disabled (high-impedance [Hi-Z]).
The pin is used to WAKEUP the CPU from idle instruction. This pin defaults to an
input at reset, but can also be configured as an active-low open-drain output signal
to wakeup an external device from an RTC alarm by setting the WU_DIR bit in the
RTCPMGT [1930h].
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.5.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions
Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
RESET
External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in
multiprocessor configurations or XF can be used as a fast generalpurpose output pin.
XF
M8
O/Z
–
DVDDIO
BH
XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the
BCLR XF instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For
more information on the ST1_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0
CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073).
For XF pin behavior at reset, see Section 5.7.3, Pin Behaviors at Reset.
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not
externally pulled low or high. Prevent current drain by externally
terminating the pin. XF pin is ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing
boundary scan. Therefore, external termination is probably not required
for most applications.
RESET
D6
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
Device reset. RESET causes the DSP to terminate execution and loads
the program counter with the contents of the reset vector. When
RESET is brought to a high level, the reset vector in ROM at FFFF00h
forces the program execution to branch to the location of the on-chip
ROM bootloader.
RESET affects the various registers and status bits.
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register but will be forced ON when RESET is asserted.
JTAG
[For more detailed information on emulation header design guidelines, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number:
SPRU589).]
IEEE standard 1149.1 test mode select. This serial control input is
clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK.
TMS
L8
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the
device, TMS must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TMS
needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold the signal at a
known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of
4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested. For board design guidelines related to
the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference
(literature number: SPRU589).
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
19
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
IEEE standard 1149.1 test data output. The contents of the selected
register (instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge
of TCK. TDO is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state except when the
scanning of data is in progress.
TDO
M7
O/Z
–
DVDDIO
BH
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the
device, TDO must be buffered.
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not
pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the
pin. TDO pin will be Hi-Z whenever not doing emulation/boundary scan,
so an external pullup is highly recommended.
IEEE standard 1149.1 test data input. TDI is clocked into the selected
register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK.
TDI
L7
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the
device, TDI must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TDI
needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold this signal at a
known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of
4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested.
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
IEEE standard 1149.1 test clock. TCK is normally a free-running clock
signal with a 50% duty cycle. The changes on input signals TMS and
TDI are clocked into the TAP controller, instruction register, or selected
test data register on the rising edge of TCK. Changes at the TAP output
signal (TDO) occur on the falling edge of TCK.
TCK
M6
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the
device, TCK must be buffered.
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
TRST
M9
I
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
IEEE standard 1149.1 reset signal for test and emulation logic. TRST,
when high, allows the IEEE standard 1149.1 scan and emulation logic
to take control of the operations of the device. If TRST is not connected
or is driven low, the device operates in its functional mode, and the
IEEE standard 1149.1 signals are ignored. The device will not operate
properly if this reset pin is never asserted low.
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).
It is recommended that an external pulldown resistor be used in
addition to the IPD -- especially if there is a long trace to an emulation
header.
Emulator 1 pin. EMU1 is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator
system and is defined as input/output by way of the emulation logic.
EMU1
M5
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of
less than 10 μsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications.
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
20
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
EMU0
NO.
L6
TYPE (1)
(2)
I/O/Z
OTHER (3)
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Emulator 0 pin. When TRST is driven low and then high, the state of
the EMU0 pin is latched and used to connect the JTAG pins (TCK,
TMS, TDI, TDO) to either the IEEE1149.1 Boundary-Scan TAP (when
the latched value of EMU0 = 0) or to the DSP Emulation TAP (when the
latched value of EMU0 = 1). Once TRST is high, EMU0 is used as an
interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as input/output
by way of the emulation logic.
An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of
less than 10 μsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications.
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS
INT1
E7
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
INT0
C6
I
IPU
DVDDIO
BH
External interrupt inputs (INT1 and INT0). These pins are maskable via
their specific Interrupt Mask Register (IMR1, IMR0) and the interrupt
mode bit. The pins can be polled and reset by their specific Interrupt
Flag Register (IFR1, IFR0).
The IPU resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the
PDINHIBR2 register.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
21
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.4
www.ti.com
EMIF Terminal Functions
Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: ASYNC (NOR, SRAM, and NAND)
Note: When accessing 8-bit Asynchronous memory:
•
Connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [22:2]
•
Connect EM_BA[1:0] to memory address pins [1:0]
For 16-bit Asynchronous memory:
•
Connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [21:1]
•
Connect EM_BA[1] to memory address pin [0]
EM_A[20]/GP[26]
J3
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 20.
Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[19]/GP[25]
G4
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 19.
Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[18]/GP[24]
G2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 18.
Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[17]/GP[23]
F2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 17.
Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[16]/GP[22]
E2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 16.
Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[15]/GP[21]
N1
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF
external address pin 15.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 14.
Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-2).
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
EM_A[14]
M1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_A[13]
L1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 13.
EM_A[12]/(CLE)
K1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 12. When interfacing with NAND Flash,
this pin also acts as Command Latch Enable (CLE).
EM_A[11]/(ALE)
K2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 11. When interfacing with NAND Flash,
this pin also acts as Address Latch Enable (ALE).
EM_A[10]
L2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 10.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
22
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
EM_A[9]
J2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 9.
EM_A[8]
J1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 8.
EM_A[7]
H2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 7.
EM_A[6]
F1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 6.
EM_A[5]
D1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 5.
EM_A[4]
C1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 4.
EM_A[3]
D2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 3.
EM_A[2]
E1
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 2.
EM_A[1]
C2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 1.
EM_A[0]
B2
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 0.
EM_D[15]
J4
EM_D[14]
K3
EM_D[13]
K4
I/O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EMIF 16-bit bi-directional bus.
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_D[12]
L3
EM_D[11]
C4
EM_D[10]
D3
EM_D[9]
F4
EM_D[8]
E3
EM_D[7]
H3
EM_D[6]
K5
EM_D[5]
M2
EM_D[4]
L4
EM_D[3]
D4
EM_D[2]
F3
EM_D[1]
E5
EM_D[0]
G3
EM_CS5
EM_CS4
EM_CS3
A3
C3
M4
O/Z
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
DVDDEMIF
BH
EMIF chip select 5 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash,
NAND flash, or SRAM).
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF chip select 4 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash,
NAND flash, or SRAM).
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF NAND chip select 3 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR
flash, NAND flash, or SRAM).
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
23
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
EM_CS2
TYPE (1)
NO.
C5
(2)
O/Z
OTHER (3)
(4)
DVDDEMIF
BH
DESCRIPTION
EMIF NAND chip select 2 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR
flash, NAND flash, or SRAM).
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF asynchronous memory write enable output
EM_WE
H1
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_OE
E4
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_R/W
B6
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_DQM1
P1
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_DQM0
B5
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
Note: These pins may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled
high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pins.
EM_BA[1]
B1
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EMIF asynchronous bank address
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF asynchronous memory read enable output
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF asynchronous read/write output
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF asynchronous data write strobes and byte enables or EMIF SDRAM and
mSDRAM data mask bits.
16-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[0] and BA[0] forms device
address [23].
EM_BA[0]
A1
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
8-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[1] and BA[0] forms device
address [0].
EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM bank address.
Note: These pins may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled
high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pins.
EMIF wait state extension input 5 for EM_CS5
EM_WAIT5
H4
I
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_WAIT4
G1
I
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_WAIT3
K6
I
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_WAIT2
D5
I
DVDDEMIF
BH
Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally
driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF wait state extension input 4 for EM_CS4
Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally
driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF wait state extension input 3 for EM_CS3
Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally
driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF wait state extension input 2 for EM_CS2
24
Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally
driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: SDRAM and mSDRAM ONLY
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM chip select 1 output
EM_CS1
A4
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_CS0
B3
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_SDCLK
M3
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_SDCKE
N2
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_SDRAS
A6
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
EM_SDCAS
B4
O/Z
DVDDEMIF
BH
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM chip select 0 output
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM clock
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM clock enable
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM row address strobe
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM column strobe
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
25
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.5
www.ti.com
I2C Terminal Functions
Table 2-9. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
I2C
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
26
SCL
B7
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
SDA
B8
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
This pin is the I2C clock output. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup is required
on this pin.
This pin is the I2C bidirectional data signal. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup
is required on this pin.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.5.6
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
I2S0 – I2S3 Terminal Functions
Table 2-10. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0 – I2S3) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Interface 0 (I2S0)
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_D0/
I2S0_DX/
GP[2]
L9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S0 transmit data output I2S0_DX.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CLK/
I2S0_CLK/
GP[0]
L10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S0 clock input/output I2S0_CLK.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_D1/
I2S0_RX/
GP[3]
M10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S0 receive data input I2S0_RX.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CMD/
I2S0_FS/
GP[1]
M11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S0 frame synchronization input/output I2S0_FS.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
Interface 1 (I2S1)
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_D0/
I2S1_DX/
GP[8]
M14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S1 transmit data output I2S1_DX.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_CLK/
I2S1_CLK/
GP[6]
M13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S1 clock input/output I2S1_CLK.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_D1/
I2S1_RX/
GP[9]
M12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S1 receive data input I2S1_RX.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S2, and GPIO.
MMC1_CMD/
I2S1_FS/
GP[7]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
L14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S1 frame synchronization input/output I2S1_FS.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
27
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-10. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0 – I2S3) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Interface 2 (I2S2)
LCD_D[11]/
I2S2_DX/
GP[27]/
SPI_TX
LCD_D8]/
I2S2_CLK/
GP[18]/
SPI_CLK
LCD_D[10]/
I2S2_RX/
GP[20]/
SPI_RX
LCD_D[9]/
I2S2_FS/
GP[19]/
SPI_CS0
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
P12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S2 transmit data output I2S2_DX.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
N10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S2 clock input/output I2S2_CLK.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
N11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S2 receive data input I2S2_RX.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, and GPIO.
P11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S2 frame synchronization input/output I2S2_FS.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Interface 3 (I2S3)
LCD_D[15]/
UART_TXD/
GP[31]/
I2S3_DX
LCD_D[12]/
UART_RTS/
GP[28]/
I2S3_CLK
LCD_D[14]/
UART_RXD/
GP[30]/
I2S3_RX
LCD_D[13]/
UART_CTS/
GP[29]/
I2S3_FS
28
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S3 transmit data output I2S3_DX.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S3 clock input/output I2S3_CLK.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S3 receive data input I2S3_RX.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For I2S, it is I2S3 frame synchronization input/output I2S3_FS.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.5.7
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
SPI Terminal Functions
Table 2-11. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Serial Port Interface (SPI)
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_CS0_E0/
SPI_CS0
P4
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
LCD_D[9]/
I2S2_FS/
GP[19]/
SPI_CS0
P11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_CS1_E1/
SPI_CS1
N4
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS1.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_RW_WRB/
SPI_CS2
P5
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
LCD_RS/
SPI_CS3
N5
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS2.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS3.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK.
LCD_EN_RDB/
SPI_CLK
N3
O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high
or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
This pin is ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing boundary scan. Therefore, external
termination is probably not required for most applications.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
LCD_D8]/
I2S2_CLK/
GP[18]/
SPI_CLK
N10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_D[1]/
SPI_TX
N6
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
LCD_D[11]/
I2S2_DX/
GP[27]/
SPI_TX
P12
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_D[0]/
SPI_RX
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
P6
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
29
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-11. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
LCD_D[10]/
I2S2_RX/
GP[20]/
SPI_RX
N11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
30
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
2.5.8
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
UART Terminal Functions
Table 2-12. UART Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
UART
LCD_D[14]/
UART_RXD/
GP[30]/
I2S3_RX
LCD_D[15]/
UART_TXD/
GP[31]/
I2S3_DX
LCD_D[13]/
UART_CTS/
GP[29]/
I2S3_FS
LCD_D[12]/
UART_RTS/
GP[28]/
I2S3_CLK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
When used by UART, it is the receive data input UART_RXD.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
In UART mode, it is the transmit data output UART_TXD.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge,UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
In UART mode, it is the clear to send input UART_CTS.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge,UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
In UART mode, it is the ready to send output UART_RTS.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
31
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.9
www.ti.com
USB 2.0 Terminal Functions
Table 2-13. USB2.0 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
USB 2.0
12-MHz crystal oscillator input.
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_MXI should be connected to ground
(VSS).
USB_MXI
G13
I
USB_VDDOSC
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is
connected to board ground (VSS).
12-MHz crystal oscillator output.
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_MXO should be left unconnected.
USB_MXO
G14
O/Z
USB_VDDOSC
USB_VDDOSC
G12
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is
connected to board ground (VSS).
3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator.
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to ground
(VSS).
Ground for USB oscillator. When using a 12-MHz crystal, this pin is a local ground
for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See Figure 5-7).
USB_VSSOSC
F11
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
A I/O
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is
connected to board ground (VSS).
USB power detect. 5-V input that signifies that VBUS is connected.
USB_VBUS
J12
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply
Sequencing.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VBUS signal should be connected
to ground (VSS).
USB_DP
H14
A I/O
USB_VDDA3P3
USB bi-directional Data Differential signal pair [positive/negative].
USB_DM
J14
A I/O
USB_VDDA3P3
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_DP and USB_DM signals should
both be tied to ground (VSS).
USB_R1
G9
A I/O
USB_VDDA3P3
External resistor connect. Reference current output. This must be connected via a
10-kΩ ±1% resistor to USB_VSSREF and be placed as close to the device as
possible.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_R1 signal should be connected via
a 10-kΩ resistor to USB_VSSREF.
USB_VSSREF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
32
G10
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to
USB_R1.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected
directly to ground (Vss).
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-13. USB2.0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY.
USB_VDDA3P3
H12
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply
Sequencing.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be
connected to ground (VSS).
USB_VSSA3P3
H11
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog ground for USB PHY.
Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits]
USB_VDDA1P3
H10
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply
Sequencing.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be
connected to ground (VSS).
USB_VSSA1P3
H9
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits].
1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY.
USB_VDD1P3
J13
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply
Sequencing.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected
to ground (VSS).
USB_VSS1P3
H13
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
USB_VDDPLL
G8
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
USB_VSSPLL
G11
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Digital core ground for USB phy.
3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected
to ground (VSS).
USB Analog PLL ground.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
33
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
2.5.10 LCD Bridge Terminal Functions
Table 2-14. LCD Bridge Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE
NO.
(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_EN_RDB/
SPI_CLK
N3
O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, this pin is either LCD Bridge read/write enable (MPU68 mode) or
read strobe (MPU80 mode).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or
low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_CS0_E0/
SPI_CS0
P4
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, this pin is either LCD Bridge chip select 0 (MPU68 and MPU80
modes) or enable 0 (HD44780 mode).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_CS1_E1/
SPI_CS1
N4
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, this pin is either LCD Bridge chip select 1 (MPU68 and MPU80
modes) or enable 1 (HD44780 mode).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_RW_WRB/
SPI_CS2
P5
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD, this pin is either LCD Bridge read/write select (HD44780 and MPU68
modes) or write strobe (MPU80 mode).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_RS/
SPI_CS3
N5
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD, this pin is the LCD Bridge address set-up.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
LCD_D[15]/
UART_TXD/
GP[31]/
I2S3_DX
LCD_D[14]/
UART_RXD/
GP[30]/
I2S3_RX
LCD_D[13]/
UART_CTS/
GP[29]/
I2S3_FS
LCD_D[12]/
UART_RTS/
GP[28]/
I2S3_CLK
LCD_D[11]/
I2S2_DX/
GP[27]/
SPI_TX
(1)
34
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 15.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 14.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 13.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, and GPIO.
N12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 12.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
P12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 11.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-14. LCD Bridge Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
LCD_D[10]/
I2S2_RX/
GP[20]/
SPI_RX
LCD_D[9]/
I2S2_FS/
GP[19]/
SPI_CS0
LCD_D[8]/
I2S2_CLK
GP[18]/
SPI_CLK
TYPE
NO.
(1)
OTHER
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
N11
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 10.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
P11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 9.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
N10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 8.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[7]/
GP[17]
P10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 7.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[6]/
GP[16]
N9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 6.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[5]/
GP[15]
P9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 5.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[4]/
GP[14]
N8
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 4.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[3]/
GP[13]
N7
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 3.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[2]/
GP[12]
P7
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 2.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_D[1]/
SPI_TX
N6
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 1.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and SPI.
LCD_D[0]/
SPI_RX
P6
I/O/Z
DVDDIO
BH
For LCD Bridge, it is LCD data pin 0.
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
35
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
2.5.11 MMC/SD Terminal Functions
Table 2-15. MMC1/SD Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
MMC/SD
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_CLK/
I2S1_CLK/
GP[6]
M13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For MMC/SD, this is the MMC1 data clock output MMC1_CLK.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_CMD/
I2S1_FS/
GP[7]
L14
MMC1_D3/
GP[11]
L13
MMC1_D2/
GP[10]
K14
MMC1_D1/
I2S1_RX/
GP[9]
MMC1_D0/
I2S1_DX/
GP[8]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
36
M12
M14
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For MMC/SD, this is the MMC1 command I/O output MMC1_CMD.
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
The MMC1_D3 and MMC1_D2 pins are multiplexed between MMC1 and GPIO.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
The MMC1_D1 and MMC1_D0 pins are multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and
GPIO.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
In MMC/SD mode, all these pins are the MMC1 nibble wide bi-directional data bus.
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1
register.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-16. MMC0/SD Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
MMC/SD
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CLK/
I2S0_CLK/
GP[0]
L10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For MMC/SD, this is the MMC0 data clock output MMC0_CLK.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CMD/
I2S0_FS/
GP[1]
M11
MMC0_D3/
GP[5]
L11
MMC0_D2/
GP[4]
L12
MMC0_D1/
I2S0_RX/
GP[3]
MMC0_D0/
I2S0_DX/
GP[2]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
M10
L9
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For MMC/SD, this is the MMC0 command I/O output MMC0_CMD.
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
The MMC0_D3 and MMC0_D2 pins are multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
The MMC0_D1 and MMC0_D0 pins are multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and
GPIO.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
In MMC/SD mode, these pins are the MMC0 nibble wide bi-directional data bus.
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1
register.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
37
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
2.5.12 SAR ADC Terminal Functions
Table 2-17. 10-Bit SAR ADC Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE
NO.
(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
VDDA_ANA
GPAIN0: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 0. This pin is demuxed
internally into ADC Channels 0, 1, & 2. GPAIN0 can also be used as a generalpurpose open-drain output. This pin is unique among the GPAIN pins in that it is the
only pin that is 3.6 V-tolerant to support measuring a battery voltage. GPAIN0 can
accommodate input voltages from 0 V to 3.6 V; although, the ADC is unable to
accept signals greater than VDDA_ANA without clamping. ADC Channel 1 is capable
of switching in an internal resistor divider that has a divide ratio of approximately 1/8.
SAR ADC
GPAIN0
D10
I/O
GPAIN1: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 1. This pin is connected to
ADC Channel 3. GPAIN1 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN1 can accommodate input
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA.
GPAIN1
A11
I/O
VDDA_ANA
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability
(see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature) of the ANA_LDO can be
exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip power-on reset (POR) resetting the
chip.
GPAIN2: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 2. This pin is connected to
ADC Channel 4. GPAIN2 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN2 can accommodate input
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA.
GPAIN2
B11
I/O
VDDA_ANA
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability
(see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature) of the ANA_LDO can be
exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip POR resetting the chip.
GPAIN3: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 3. This pin is connected to
ADC Channel 5. GPAIN3 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN3 can accommodate input
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA.
GPAIN3
(1)
38
C11
I/O
VDDA_ANA
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability
(see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature) of the ANA_LDO can be
exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip POR resetting the chip.
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.13 GPIO Terminal Functions
Table 2-18. GPIO Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
General-Purpose Input/Output
External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in multiprocessor
configurations or XF can be used as a fast general-purpose output pin.
XF
M8
O/Z
–
DVDDIO
BH
XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the BCLR XF
instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For more information on the
ST1_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature
number: SWPU073).
For XF pin behavior at reset, see Section 5.7.3, Pin Behaviors at Reset.
Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not externally
pulled low or high. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. XF pin is
ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing boundary scan. Therefore, external termination
is probably not required for most applications.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CLK/
I2S0_CLK/
GP[0]
L10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 0 (GP[0]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_CMD/
I2S0_FS/
GP[1]
M11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 1 (GP[1]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_D0/
I2S0_DX/
GP[2]
L9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 2 (GP[2]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO.
MMC0_D1/
I2S0_RX/
GP[3]
M10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 3 (GP[3]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO.
MMC0_D2/
GP[4]
L12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 4 (GP[4]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO.
MMC0_D3/
GP[5]
MMC1_CLK/
I2S1_CLK/
GP[6]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
L11
M13
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 5 (GP[5]).
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 6 (GP[6]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
39
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-18. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1 ,and GPIO.
MMC1_CMD/
I2S1_FS/
GP[7]
L14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 7 (GP[7]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_D0/
I2S1_DX/
GP[8]
M14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 8 (GP[8]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO.
MMC1_D1/
I2S1_RX/
GP[9]
M12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 9 (GP[9]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1 and GPIO.
MMC1_D2/
GP[10]
K14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 10 (GP[10]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1 and GPIO.
MMC1_D3/
GP[11]
L13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 11 (GP[11]).
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[2]/
GP[12]
P7
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 12 (GP[12]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[3]/
GP[13]
N7
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 13 (GP[13]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[4]/
GP[14]
N8
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 14 (GP[14]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[5]/
GP[15]
P9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 15 (GP[15]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[6]/
GP[16]
N9
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 16 (GP[16]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
LCD_D[7]/
GP[17]
40
P10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 17 (GP[17]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 2-18. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
LCD_D8]/
I2S2_CLK/
GP[18]/
SPI_CLK
LCD_D[9]/
I2S2_FS/
GP[19]/
SPI_CS0
LCD_D[10]/
I2S2_RX/
GP[20]/
SPI_RX
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge and GPIO.
N10
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 18 (GP[18]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, and GPIO.
P11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 19 (GP[19]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO and SPI.
N11
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 20 (GP[20]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[15]/GP[21]
N1
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]).
Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[16]/GP[22]
E2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]).
Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[17]/GP[23]
F2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]).
Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[18]/GP[24]
G2
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]).
Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[19]/GP[25]
G4
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]).
Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.
EM_A[20]/GP[26]
J3
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDEMIF
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]).
Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR.
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register.
LCD_D[11]/
I2S2_DX/
GP[27]/
SPI_TX
LCD_D[12]/
UART_RTS/
GP[28]/
I2S3_CLK
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.
P12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 27 (GP[27]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N12
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 28 (GP[28]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
41
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-18. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
LCD_D[13]/
UART_CTS/
GP[29]/
I2S3_FS
LCD_D[14]/
UART_RXD/
GP[30]/
I2S3_RX
LCD_D[15]/
UART_TXD/
GP[31]/
I2S3_DX
42
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 29 (GP[29]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
N13
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 30 (GP[30]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
This pin is multiplexed between LCD Bridge, UART, GPIO, and I2S3.
P14
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDDIO
BH
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 31 (GP[31]).
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be
enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.14 Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions
Table 2-19. Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Regulators
DSP_LDOO
E10
S
DSP_LDO output. [Not supported on this device]
The DSP_LDO is not supported on this device, so DSP_LDOO pin must be left
unconnected. DSP_LDO can be enabled to provide a regulated 1.3 V or 1.05 V
output only to the internal POR to support the RTC only mode (see Section 5.11.1,
RTC Only Mode for details). DSP_LDOO must never be used to provide power to
the CPU Core (CVDD) on this device.
When disabled, this pin is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state.
LDOI
F14,
F13,
B12
S
LDO inputs. The LDOI pins must be connected to the same power supply source
with a voltage range of 1.8V to 3.6V. These pins supply power to the internal LDO,
the bandgap reference generator circuits, and serve as the I/O supply for some input
pins.
DSP_LDO enable input. This signal is not intended to be dynamically switched.
0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal POR monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage
and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal.
1 = DSP_LDO is disabled.
DSP_LDO_EN
D12
I
–
LDOI
The internal POR voltage monitoring is also disabled. The internal POWERGOOD
signal is forced high and the external reset signal on the RESET pin (D6) is the only
source of the device reset.
Note: DSP_LDO can be enabled only to support the RTC only mode (see
Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode for details), otherwise, DSP_LDO should be
disabled on this device. DSP_LDO output must never be used to provide power to
the CPU Core (CVDD) on this device.
USB_LDO output. [Not supported on this device]
USB_LDOO
F12
S
For proper device operation, this pin must be left unconnected.
ANA_LDO output. This output provides a regulated 1.3 V output and up to 4 mA of
current (see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over
Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature).
ANA_LDOO
A12
S
For proper device operation, this pin must be connected to an ~ 1.0 μF decoupling
capacitor to VSS. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.4, Power-Supply
Decoupling. This LDO is intended to supply power to the VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL
pins and not external devices.
When VDDA_PLL requires 1.4 V, VDDA_PLL must be powered externally and the
ANA_LDO output can provide a regulated 1.3 V, but only to VDDA_ANA, not both.
Bandgap reference filter signal. For proper device operation, this pin needs to be
bypassed with a 0.1 μF capacitor to analog ground (VSSA_ANA).
BG_CAP
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
B13
A, I/O
This external capacitor provides filtering for stable reference voltages & currents
generated by the bandgap circuit. The bandgap produces the references for use by
the System PLL, SAR, and POR circuits.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
43
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
2.5.15 Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions
Table 2-20. Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
Reserved
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
44
RSV0
C12
I
RSV1
J10
PWR
RSV2
J11
PWR
–
LDOI
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS.
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD.
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD.
RSV3
D14
I
–
LDOI
RSV4
C14
I
–
LDOI
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS.
RSV5
C13
I
–
LDOI
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS.
RSV16
D13
I
–
LDOI
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be directly tied to VSS.
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.16 Supply Voltage Terminal Functions
Table 2-21. Supply Voltage Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGES
F6
1.05-V Digital Core supply voltage (60 or 75 MHz)
H8
CVDD
J6
PWR
1.3-V Digital Core supply voltage (100 or 120 MHz)
K10
1.4-V Digital Core supply voltage (150 MHz)
L5
F7
K7
DVDDIO
K12
N14
PWR
1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for non-EMIF and non-RTC I/Os
The DVDDIO must always be powered for proper operation.
PWR
1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V EMIF I/O power supply
Note: When EMIF is not used, it is permissable to ground the DVDDEMIF supply pins
if the following conditions are all met:
•
At least one DVDDEMIF package ball (A2, A5, E6, F5, G5, H5, H7, J5, P2) is
grounded. The others must be either floating or grounded.
•
All signal pins that use DVDDEMIF as their I/O supply voltage (i.e., all pins listed
in Table 2-8, External Memory Interface Terminal Functions), regardless of
multiplexing options, are either:
– all grounded
– all floating (not driven by any external source), or
– any combination of grounded or floating.
P3
P8
A2
A5
E6
F5
DVDDEMIF
G5
H5
H7
J5
P2
1.05-V thru 1.3-V RTC digital core and RTC oscillator power supply.
CVDDRTC
DVDDRTC
C8
F8
PWR
Note: The CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power source even
though RTC is not used. CVDDRTC cannot be powered by any of the on-chip LDOs.
1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for RTC_CLOCKOUT and WAKEUP
pins.
Note: The DVDDRTC can be tied to ground (VSS) when the RTC_CLKOUT and
WAKEUP pins are not permanently used. In this case, the WAKEUP pin must be
configured as output by software (see Table 5-25, RTCPMGT Register Bit
Descriptions).
PWR
1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT ≤ 120
MHz).
VDDA_PLL
C10
PWR
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin.
1.4-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT > 120
MHz)
Note: When VDDA_PLL requires 1.4 V, VDDA_PLL must be powered externally.
USB_VDDPLL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
G8
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected
to ground (VSS).
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
45
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-21. Supply Voltage Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
J13
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY.
USB_VDD1P3
H10
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits]
USB_VDDA1P3
H12
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY.
USB_VDDA3P3
G12
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator.
USB_VDDOSC
VDDA_ANA
A10
PWR
46
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected
to ground (VSS).
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be
connected to ground (VSS).
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be
connected to ground (VSS).
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to
ground (VSS).
1.3-V supply for power management and 10-bit SAR ADC.
This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2.5.17 Ground Terminal Functions
Table 2-22. Ground Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE (1)
NO.
(2)
OTHER (3)
(4)
DESCRIPTION
A13
A14
D7
D11
E9
E11
E12
E13
E14
F9
VSS
F10
GND
Ground pins
Ground for RTC oscillator. When using a 32.768-KHz crystal, this pin is a local
ground for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See
Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5). When not using RTC and the crystal is not populated on
the board, this pin is connected to the board ground.
G6
G7
H6
J7
J8
J9
K8
K9
K11
K13
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
VSSRTC
C9
GND
VSSA_PLL
D9
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator.
USB_VSSPLL
G11
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
USB Analog PLL ground.
USB_VSS1P3
H13
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Digital core ground for USB phy.
USB_VSSA1P3
H9
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits].
USB_VSSA3P3
H11
GND
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Analog ground for USB PHY.
USB_VSSOSC
F11
S
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
Ground for USB oscillator.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder
Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to
float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
47
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 2-22. Ground Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
USB_VSSREF
VSSA_ANA
48
TYPE (1)
NO.
G10
B10
B14
(2)
GND
GND
OTHER (3)
(4)
see
Section 4.2,
ROC
DESCRIPTION
Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to
USB_R1.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected
directly to ground (Vss).
Ground pins for power management (POR & Bandgap circuits) and 10-bit SAR ADC
Device Overview
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3 Device Configuration
3.1
System Registers
The system registers in Table 3-1 configure the device and monitor its status.
Table 3-1. Idle Control, Status, and System Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
(1)
ACRONYM
Register Description
0001h
ICR
Idle Control Register
0002h
ISTR
Idle Status Register
1C00h
EBSR
1C02h
PCGCR1
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 1
1C03h
PCGCR2
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 2
1C04h
PSRCR
Peripheral Software Reset Counter Register
1C05h
PRCR
Peripheral Reset Control Register
1C14h
TIAFR
Timer Interrupt Aggregation Flag Register
External Bus Selection Register
1C16h
ODSCR
1C17h
PDINHIBR1
Pull-Down Inhibit Register 1
1C18h
PDINHIBR2
Pull-Down Inhibit Register 2
Pull-Down Inhibit Register 3
see Section 3.6.1 of this
document.
Output Drive Strength Control Register
1C19h
PDINHIBR3
1C1Ah
DMA0CESR1
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 1
1C1Bh
DMA0CESR2
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 2
1C1Ch
DMA1CESR1
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 1
1C1Dh
DMA1CESR2
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 2
1C26h
ECDR
1C28h
RAMSLPMDCNTLR1
DARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 1
1C2Ah
RAMSLPMDCNTLR2
SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 2
1C2Bh
RAMSLPMDCNTLR3
SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 3
1C2Ch
RAMSLPMDCNTLR4
SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 4
1C2Dh
RAMSLPMDCNTLR5
SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 5
1C30h
DMAIFR
DMA Interrupt Flag Aggregation Register
1C31h
DMAIER
DMA Interrupt Enable Register
1C32h
USBSCR
USB System Control Register
1C33h
ESCR
EMIF System Control Register
1C36h
DMA2CESR1
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 1
1C37h
DMA2CESR2
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 2
1C38h
DMA3CESR1
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 1
1C39h
DMA3CESR2
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 2
1C3Ah
CLKSTOP
1C40h
DIEIDR0
(1)
Die ID Register 0
1C41h
DIEIDR1 (1)
Die ID Register 1
1C42h
DIEIDR2 (1)
Die ID Register 2
1C43h
DIEIDR3
(1)
Die ID Register 3
1C44h
DIEIDR4 (1)
Die ID Register 4
1C45h
DIEIDR5 (1)
Die ID Register 5
1C46h
DIEIDR6 (1)
Die ID Register 6
1C47h
(1)
Die ID Register 7
DIEIDR7
COMMENTS
EMIF Clock Divider Register
Peripheral Clock Stop Request/Acknowledge Register
This register is reserved.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
49
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3.2
www.ti.com
Power Considerations
The device provides several means of managing power consumption.
To
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.2.1
minimize power consumption, the device divides its circuits into nine main isolated supply domains:
LDOI (ANA_LDO and Bandgap Power Supply)
Analog POR, SAR, and PLL (VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL)
RTC Core (CVDDRTC) — Note: CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power source and
none of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC.
Digital Core (CVDD)
USB Core (USB_ VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3)
USB PHY and USB PLL (USB_VDDOSC, USB_VDDA3P3, and USB_VDDPLL)
EMIF I/O (DVDDEMIF)
RTC I/O (DVDDRTC)
Rest of the I/O (DVDDIO)
LDO Configuration
The device includes one Low-Dropout Regulator (LDO) which can be used to regulate the power supplies
of the analog PLL and SAR ADC.
3.2.1.1
LDO Inputs
The LDOI pins (B12, F13, F14) provide power to the internal ANA_LDO, the bandgap reference generator,
and some I/O input pins, and can range from 1.8 V to 3.6 V. The bandgap provides accurate voltage and
current references to the LDO PLL, and SAR; therefore, for proper device operation, power must always
be applied to the LDOI pins even if the LDO output is not used.
3.2.1.2
LDO Outputs
The ANA_LDOO pin (A12) is the output of the internal ANA_LDO and can provide regulated 1.3 V power
of up to 4 mA. The ANA_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the board, to the VDDA_ANA and
VDDA_PLL pins to provide a regulated 1.3 V to the 10-bit SAR ADC and System PLL. VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL
may be powered by this LDO output, however when VDDA_PLL requires 1.4 V, VDDA_PLL must be powered
externally and ANA_LDO output can provide a regulated 1.3 V, but only to VDDA_ANA, not both.
Note: The DSP_LDO is not supported on this device. However, DSP_LDO can be enabled to support the
RTC only mode (see Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode for details), otherwise, DSP_LDO should be
disabled on this device and the DSP_LDO output pin must be always left unconnected.
The USB_LDO is not supported on this device, so the USB_LDO must be left disabled. USB_LDO is
disabled at reset, so it does not require any action to disable the USB_LDO. When the USB_LDO is
disabled, the USB_LDOO pin is in a high-impedance (Hi-Z) state and should be left unconnected.
50
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Clock Considerations
The system clock, which is used by the CPU and most of the DSP peripherals, is controlled by the system
clock generator. The system clock generator features a software-programmable PLL multiplier and several
dividers. The clock generator accepts an input reference clock from the CLKIN pin or the output clock of
the 32.768-KHz real-time clock (RTC) oscillator. The selection of the input reference clock is based on the
state of the CLK_SEL pin. The CLK_SEL pin is required to be statically tied high or low and cannot
change dynamically after reset.
In addition, the DSP requires a reference clock for USB applications. The USB reference clock is
generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 12-MHz external crystal connected to the USB_MXI
and USB_MXO pins.
The USB reference clock is not required if the USB peripheral is not being used. To completely disable the
USB oscillator, connect the USB_MXI pin to ground (VSS) and leave the USB_MXO pin unconnected. The
USB oscillator power pins (USB_VDDOSC and USB_VSSOSC) should also be connected to ground.
The RTC oscillator generates a clock when a 32.768-KHz crystal is connected to the RTC_XI and
RTC_XO pins. The 32.768-KHz crystal can be disabled if CLKIN is used as the clock source for the DSP.
However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC peripheral will not operate and the RTC registers
(I/O address range 1900h – 197Fh) will not be accessible. This includes the RTC power management
register (RTCPMGT) which controls the RTCLKOUT and WAKEUP pins. To disable the RTC oscillator,
connect the RTC_XI pin to CVDDRTC and the RTC_XO pin to ground.
For more information on crystal specifications for the RTC oscillator and the USB oscillator, see
Section 5.4, External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins.
3.3.1
Clock Configurations After Device Reset
After reset, the on-chip Bootloader programs the system clock generator based on the input clock selected
via the CLK_SEL pin. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader programs the system clock generator and sets the
system clock to 12.288 MHz (multiply the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator clock by 375). If CLK_SEL = 1, the
Bootloader bypasses the system clock generator altogether and the system clock is driven by the CLKIN
pin. In this case, the CLKIN frequency is expected to be 11.2896 MHz, 12.0 MHz, or 12.288 MHz. While
the bootloader tries to boot from the USB, the clock generator will be programmed to output approximately
36 MHz.
3.3.1.1
Device Clock Frequency
After the boot process is complete, the user is allowed to re-program the system clock generator to bring
the device up to the desired clock frequency and the desired peripheral clock state (clock gating or not).
The user must adhere to various clock requirements when programming the system clock generator. For
more information, see Section 5.5, Clock PLLs.
Note: The on-chip Bootloader allows for DSP registers to be configured during the boot process.
However, this feature must not be used to change the output frequency of the system clock generator
during the boot process. Timer0 is also used by the bootloader to allow for 200 ms of BG_CAP settling
time. The bootloader register modification feature must not modify the Timer0 registers.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
51
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3.3.1.2
www.ti.com
Peripheral Clock State
The clock and reset state of each of peripheral is controlled through a set of system registers. The
peripheral clock gating control registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) are used to enable and disable
peripheral clocks. The peripheral software reset counter register (PSRCR) and the peripheral reset control
register (PRCR) are used to assert and de-assert peripheral reset signals.
At hardware reset, all of the peripheral clocks are off to conserve power. After hardware reset, the DSP
boots via the bootloader code in ROM. During the boot process, the bootloader queries each peripheral to
determine if it can boot from that peripheral. In other words, it reads each peripheral looking for a valid
boot image file. At that time, the individual peripheral clocks will be enabled for the query and then
disabled again when the bootloader is finished with the peripheral. By the time the bootloader releases
control to the user code, all peripheral clocks will be off and all domains in the ICR, except the CPU
domain, will be idled.
3.3.1.3
USB Oscillator Control
The USB oscillator is controlled through the USB system control register (USBSCR). To enable the
oscillator, the USBOSCDIS and USBOSCBIASDIS bits must be cleared to 0. The user must wait until the
USB oscillator stabilizes before proceeding with the USB configuration. The USB oscillator stabilization
time is typically 100 μs, with a 10 ms maximum (Note: the startup time is highly dependent on the ESR
and capacitive load on the crystal).
52
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.4
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Boot Sequence
The boot sequence is a process by which the device's on-chip memory is loaded with program and data
sections from an external image file (in flash memory, for example). The boot sequence also allows,
optionally, for some of the device's internal registers to be programmed with predetermined values. The
boot sequence is started automatically after each device reset. For more details on device reset, see
Section 5.7, Reset.
There are several methods by which the memory and register initialization can take place. Each of these
methods is referred to as a boot mode. At reset, the device cycles through different boot modes until an
image is found with a valid boot signature. The on-chip Bootloader allows the DSP registers to be
configured during the boot process, if the optional register configuration section is present in the boot
image (see Figure 3-1). For more information on the boot modes supported, see Section 3.4.1, Boot
Modes.
The device Bootloader follows the following steps as shown in Figure 3-1
1. Immediately after reset, the CPU fetches the reset vector from 0xFFFF00. MP/MC is 0 by default, so
0xFFFF00 is mapped to internal ROM. The PLL is in bypass mode.
2. Set CLKOUT slew rate control to slow slew rate.
3. Idle all peripherals, MPORT and HWA.
4. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader powers up the PLL and sets its output frequency to 12.288 MHz (with
a 375x multiplier using VP = 749, VS = 0, input divider disabled, output divide-by-8 enabled, and output
divider enabled with VO = 0). If CLK_SEL = 1, the Bootloader keeps the PLL bypassed.
5. Apply manufacturing trim to the bandgap references.
6. Disable CLKOUT.
7. Test for NOR boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 16-bit access:
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot signature.
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 8.
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.
(d) Attempt NOR boot, go to step 17.
8. Test for NAND boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 8-bit access:
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 9.
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.
(d) Attempt NAND boot, go to step 17.
9. Test for 16-bit and 24-bit SPI EEPROM boot on SPI_CS[0] with 500-KHz clock rate and for Parallel
Port Mode on External bus Selection Register set to 5, then set to 6:
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match using 16-bit address mode.
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, read the first 2 bytes again using 24-bit address mode.
(c) If the boot signature is not valid from either case (16-bit and 24-bit address modes), go to step 10.
(d) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.
(e) Attempt SPI Serial Memory boot, go to step 17.
10. Test for I2C EEPROM boot with a 7-bit slave address 0x50 and 400-kHz clock rate.
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 11.
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.
(d) Attempt I2C EEPROM boot, go to step 17.
11. Test for MMC/SD boot — For more information on MMC/SD boot, contact your local sales
representative.
12. Set the PLL output to approximately 36 MHz. If CLK_SEL = 1, CLKIN multiplied by 3x, ; if CLK_SEL =
0, CLKIN is multiplied by 1125x.
13. Test for USB boot — For more information on USB boot, contact your local sales representative.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
53
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
If the boot signature is not valid, then go back to step 14 and repeat.
Set register configuration.
Copy boot image sections to system memory.
Enable TIMER0 to start counting 200 ms.
Ensure a minimum of 200 ms has elapsed since step 17 before proceeding to execute the bootloaded
code.
19. Jump to the entry point specified in the boot image.
CLK SEL = 1
?
No
Setup PLL to
x375
Yes
Internal Configuration
NOR Boot
?
Yes
No
NAND Boot
?
Yes
No
SPI Boot
?
Yes
No
Set Register
Configuration
I2C Boot
?
Yes
Copy Boot
Image Sections
to System
Memory
No
MMC/SD0 Boot
?
Yes
Start Timer0 to Count
200 ms
No
USB Boot
?
No
Yes
Has Timer0
Counter Expired
?
No
Yes
Jump to Stored
Execution Point
Figure 3-1. Bootloader Software Architecture
54
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.4.1
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Boot Modes
The device DSP supports the following boot modes in the following device order: NOR Flash, NAND
Flash, SPI 16-bit EEPROM, SPI 24-bit Flash, I2C EEPROM, and MMC/SD card. The boot mode is
determined by checking for a valid boot signature on each supported boot device. The first boot device
with a valid boot signature will be used to load and execute the user code. If none of the supported boot
devices have a valid boot signature, the Bootloader goes into an endless loop checking the USB boot
mode and the device must be reset to look for another valid boot image in the supported boot modes.
Note: For detailed information on MMC/SD and USB boot modes, contact your local sales representative.
3.4.2
Boot Configuration
After reset, the on-chip Bootloader programs the system clock generator based on the input clock selected
via the CLK_SEL pin. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader programs the system clock generator and sets the
system clock to 12.288 MHz (multiply the 32.768-KHz RTC oscillator clock by 375). If CLK_SEL = 1, the
Bootloader bypasses the system clock generator altogether and the system clock is driven by the CLKIN
pin.
Note:
• When CLK_SEL =1, the CLKIN frequency is expected to be 11.2896 MHz, 12.0 MHz, or 12.288 MHz.
• The on-chip Bootloader allows for DSP registers to be configured during the boot process. However,
this feature must not be used to change the output frequency of the system clock generator during the
boot process. Timer0 is also used by the bootloader to allow for 200 ms of BG_CAP settling time. The
bootloader register modification feature must not modify the Timer0 registers.
After hardware reset, the DSP boots via the bootloader code in ROM. During the boot process, the
bootloader queries each peripheral to determine if it can boot from that peripheral. At that time, the
individual peripheral clocks will be enabled for the query and then disabled when the bootloader is finished
with the peripheral. By the time the bootloader releases control to the user code, all peripheral clocks will
be "off" and all domains in the ICR, except the CPU domain, will be idled.
3.4.3
DSP Resources Used By the Bootloader
The Bootloader uses SARAM block 31 for the storing of temporary data. This block of memory is reserved
during the boot process. However, after the boot process is complete, it can be used by the user
application.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
55
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3.5
www.ti.com
Configurations at Reset
Some device configurations are determined at reset. The following subsections give more details.
3.5.1
Device and Peripheral Configurations at Device Reset
Table 3-2 summarizes the device boot and configuration pins that are required to be statically tied high,
tied low, or left unconnected during device operation. For proper device operation, a device reset should
be initiated after changing any of these pin functions.
Table 3-2. Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins
CONFIGURATION PINS
SIGNAL NO.
IPU/IPD
DSP_LDO_EN
D12
–
DSP_LDO enable input. This signal is not
intended to be dynamically switched.
0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal POR
monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage and
generates the internal POWERGOOD signal.
1 = DSP_LDO is disabled. The internal POR
voltage monitoring is also disabled. The internal
POWERGOOD signal is forced high and the
external reset signal on the RESET pin (D6) is
the only source of the device reset.
Note: DSP_LDO can be enabled only to support
the RTC only mode (see Section 5.11.1, RTC
Only Mode for details), otherwise, DSP_LDO
should be disabled on this device. DSP_LDO
output must never be used to provide power to
the CPU Core (CVDD) on this device.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
CLK_SEL
C7
–
Clock input select.
0 = 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives the RTC
timer and the system clock generator. CLKIN is
ignored.
1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator and
the 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives only the RTC
timer.
This pin is not allowed to change during device
operation; it must be tied to DVDDIO or GND at
the board.
For proper device operation, external pullup/pulldown resistors may be required on these device
configuration pins. For discussion on situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see
Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
This device also has RESERVED pins that need to be configured correctly for proper device operation
(statically tied high, tied low, or left unconnected at all times). For more details on these pins, see Table 220, Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions.
3.6
Configurations After Reset
The following sections provide details on configuring the device after reset. Multiplexed pin functions are
selected by software after reset. For more details on multiplexed pin function control, see Section 3.7,
Multiplexed Pin Configurations.
3.6.1
External Bus Selection Register (EBSR)
The External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) determines the mapping of the LCD controller, I2S2, I2S3,
UART, SPI, and GPIO signals to 21 signals of the external parallel port pins. It also determines the
mapping of the I2S or MMC/SD ports to serial port 1 pins and serial port 2 pins. The EBSR register is
located at port address 0x1C00. Once the bit fields of this register are changed, the routing of the signals
takes place on the next CPU clock cycle.
56
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Additionally, the EBSR controls the function of the upper bits of the EMIF address bus. Pins
EM_A[20:15]/GP[26:21] can be individually configured as GPIO pins through the Axx_MODE bits. When
Axx_MODE = 1, the EM_A[xx] pin functions as a GPIO pin. When Axx_MODE = 0, the EM_A[xx] pin
retains its EMIF functionality.
Before modifying the values of the external bus selection register, you must clock gate all affected
peripherals through the Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register. After the external bus selection register
has been modified, you must reset the peripherals before using them through the Peripheral Software
Reset Counter Register.
Figure 3-2. External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) [1C00h]
15
14
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
PPMODE
SP1MODE
SP0MODE
R-0
R/W-000
R/W-00
R/W-00
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
A20_MODE
A19_MODE
A18_MODE
A17_MODE
A16_MODE
A15_MODE
R-0
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset
Table 3-3. EBSR Register Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
15
RESERVED
14:12
11:10
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
PPMODE
Parallel Port Mode Control Bits. These bits control the pin multiplexing of the LCD Controller, SPI,
UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] pins on the parallel port. For more details, see Table 3-4,
LCD Controller, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing.
000 = Mode 0 (16-bit LCD Controller). All 21 signals of the LCD Bridge module are routed to the 21
external signals of the parallel port.
001 = Mode 1 (SPI, GPIO, UART, and I2S2). 7 signals of the SPI module, 6 GPIO signals, 4
signals of the UART module and 4 signals of the I2S2 module are routed to the 21 external signals
of the parallel port.
010 = Mode 2 (8-bit LCD Controller and GPIO). 8-bits of pixel data of the LCD Controller module
and 8 GPIO are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port.
011 = Mode 3 (8-bit LCD Controller, SPI, and I2S3). 8-bits of pixel data of the LCD Controller
module, 4 signals of the SPI module, and 4 signals of the I2S3 module are routed to the 21 external
signals of the parallel port.
100 = Mode 4 (8-bit LCD Controller, I2S2, and UART). 8-bits of pixel data of the LCD Controller
module, 4 signals of the I2S2 module, and 4 signals of the UART module are routed to the 21
external signals of the parallel port.
101 = Mode 5 (8-bit LCD Controller,SPI, and UART). 8-bits of pixel data of the LCD Controller
module, 4 signals of the SPI module, and 4 signals of the UART module are routed to the 21
external signals of the parallel port.
110 = Mode 6 (SPI, I2S2, I2S3, and GPIO). 7 signals of the SPI module, 4 signals of the I2S2
module, 4 signals of the I2S3 module, and 6 GPIO are routed to the 21 external signals of the
parallel port.
111 = Reserved.
SP1MODE
Serial Port 1 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO
pins on serial port 1. For more details, see Table 3-5, MMC1, I2S1 , and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing.
00 = Mode 0 (MMC/SD1). All 6 signals of the MMC/SD1 module are routed to the 6 external signals
of the serial port 1.
01 = Mode 1 (I2S1 and GP[11:10]). 4 signals of the I2S1 module and 2 GP[11:10] signals are
routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 1.
10 = Mode 2 (GP[11:6]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[11:6]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial
port 1.
11 = Reserved.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
57
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 3-3. EBSR Register Bit Descriptions (continued)
BIT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
9:8
SP0MODE
Serial Port 0 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO
pins on serial port 0. For more details, see Section 3.7.1.3, MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin
Multiplexing.
00 = Mode 0 (MMC/SD0). All 6 signals of the MMC/SD0 module are routed to the 6 external signals
of the serial port 0.
01 = Mode 1 (I2S0 and GP[5:0]). 4 signals of the I2S0 module and 2 GP[5:4] signals are routed to
the 6 external signals of the serial port 0.
10 = Mode 2 (GP[5:0]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[5:0]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial
port 0.
11 = Reserved.
7
RESERVED
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
6
RESERVED
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
5
A20_MODE
A20 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 20 (EM_A[20]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]) pin functions.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 20 (EM_A[20]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]).
4
A19_MODE
A19 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 19 (EM_A[19]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]) pin functions.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 19 (EM_A[19]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]).
3
A18_MODE
A18 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 18 (EM_A[18]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]) pin functions.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 18 (EM_A[18]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]).
A17_MODE
A17 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 17 (EM_A[17]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-6,
EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 17 (EM_A[17]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]).
A16_MODE
A16 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 16 (EM_A[16]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-6,
EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 16 (EM_A[16]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]).
A15_MODE
A15 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 15 (EM_A[15]) and
general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-6,
EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing.
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 15 (EM_A[15]).
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]).
2
1
0
3.6.2
EMIF and USB System Control Registers (ESCR and USBSCR) [1C33h and 1C32h]
After reset, by default, the CPU performs 16-bit accesses to the EMIF and USB registers and data space.
To perform 8-bit accesses to the EMIF data space, the user must set the BYTEMODE bits to 01b for the
"high byte" or 10b for the "low byte" in the EMIF System Control Register (ESCR). Similarly, the
BYTEMODE bits in the USB System Control Register (USBSCR) must also be configured for byte access.
3.6.3
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) [1C02h and 1C03h]
After hardware reset, the DSP executes the on-chip bootloader from ROM. As the bootloader executes, it
selectively enables the clock of the peripheral being queried for a valid boot. If a valid boot source is not
found, the bootloader disables the clock to that peripheral and moves on to the next peripheral in the boot
order. After the boot process is complete, all of the peripheral clocks will be off and all domains in the ICR,
except for the CPU domain, will be idled (this includes the MPORT and HWA). The user must enable the
clocks to the peripherals and CPU ports that are going to be used. The peripheral clock gating control
registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) are used to enable and disable the peripheral clocks.
58
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.6.4
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PDINHIBR1/2/3) [1C17h, 1C18h, and 1C19h,
respectively]
Each internal pullup and pulldown (IPU/IPD) resistor on the device DSP, except for the IPD on TRST, can
be individually controlled through the IPU/IPD registers (PDINHIBR1 [1C17h] , PDINHIBR2 [1C18h], and
PDINHIBR3 [1C19h]). To minimize power consumption, internal pullup or pulldown resistors should be
disabled in the presence of an external pullup or pulldown resistor or external driver. Section 3.8.1,
Pullup/Pulldown Resistors, describes other situations in which an pullup and pulldown resistors are
required.
When CVDD is powered down, pullup and pulldown resistors will be forced disabled and an internal busholder will be enabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior When Core
Power (CVDD) is Down.
3.6.5
Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [1C16h]
To provide the lowest power consumption setting, the DSP has configurable slew rate control on the EMIF
and CLKOUT output pins. The output slew rate control register (OSRCR) is used to set a subset of the
device I/O pins, namely CLKOUT and EMIF pins, to either fast or slow slew rate. The slew rate feature is
implemented by staging/delaying turn-on times of the parallel p-channel drive transistors and parallel nchannel drive transistors of the output buffer. In the slow slew rate configuration, the delay is longer, but
ultimately the same number of parallel transistors are used to drive the output high or low. Thus, the drive
strength is ultimately the same. The slower slew rate control can be used for power savings and has the
greatest effect at lower DVDDIO and DVDDEMIF voltages.
3.7
Multiplexed Pin Configurations
The device DSP uses pin multiplexing to accommodate a larger number of peripheral functions in the
smallest possible package, providing the ultimate flexibility for end applications. The external bus selection
register (EBSR) controls all the pin multiplexing functions on the device.
3.7.1
Pin Multiplexing Details
This section discusses how to program the external bus selection register (EBSR) to select the desired
peripheral functions and pin muxing. See the individual pin mux sections for pin muxing details for a
specific muxed pin. After changing any of the pin mux control registers, it will be necessary to reset the
peripherals that are affected.
3.7.1.1
LCD Controller, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.PPMODE
Bits]
The LCD Controller, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the
PPMODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual
pin functions, see Table 3-4.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
59
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 3-4. LCD Controller, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing
EBSR PPMODE BITS
PDINHIBR3
REGISTER
BIT FIELDS
PIN NAME
LCD_EN_RDB/SPI_CLK
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
MODE 4
MODE 5
MODE 6
000
(Reset Default)
001
010
011
100
101
110
LCD_EN_RDB
SPI_CLK
LCD_EN_RDB
LCD_EN_RDB
LCD_EN_RDB
LCD_EN_RDB
SPI_CLK
LCD_D[0]/SPI_RX
LCD_D[0]
SPI_RX
LCD_D[0]
LCD_D[0]
LCD_D[0]
LCD_D[0]
SPI_RX
LCD_D[1]/SPI_TX
LCD_D[1]
SPI_TX
LCD_D[1]
LCD_D[1]
LCD_D[1]
LCD_D[1]
SPI_TX
P2PD
LCD_D[2]/GP[12]
LCD_D[2]
GP[12]
LCD_D[2]
LCD_D[2]
LCD_D[2]
LCD_D[2]
GP[12]
P3PD
LCD_D[3]/GP[13]
LCD_D[3]
GP[13]
LCD_D[3]
LCD_D[3]
LCD_D[3]
LCD_D[3]
GP[13]
P4PD
LCD_D[4]/GP[14]
LCD_D[4]
GP[14]
LCD_D[4]
LCD_D[4]
LCD_D[4]
LCD_D[4]
GP[14]
P5PD
LCD_D[5]/GP[15]
LCD_D[5]
GP[15]
LCD_D[5]
LCD_D[5]
LCD_D[5]
LCD_D[5]
GP[15]
P6PD
LCD_D[6]/GP[16]
LCD_D[6]
GP[16]
LCD_D[6]
LCD_D[6]
LCD_D[6]
LCD_D[6]
GP[16]
P7PD
LCD_D[7]/GP[17]
LCD_D[7]
GP[17]
LCD_D[7]
LCD_D[7]
LCD_D[7]
LCD_D[7]
GP[17]
P8PD
LCD_D[8]/I2S2_CLK/GP[18]/SPI_CLK
LCD_D[8]
I2S2_CLK
GP[18]
SPI_CLK
I2S2_CLK
SPI_CLK
I2S2_CLK
P9PD
LCD_D[9]/I2S2_FS/GP[19]/SPI_CS0
LCD_D[9]
I2S2_FS
GP[19]
SPI_CS0
I2S2_FS
SPI_CS0
I2S2_FS
P10PD
LCD_D[10]/I2S2_RX/GP[20]/SPI_RX
LCD_D[10]
I2S2_RX
GP[20]
SPI_RX
I2S2_RX
SPI_RX
I2S2_RX
P11PD
LCD_D[11]/I2S2_DX/GP[27]/SPI_TX
LCD_D[11]
I2S2_DX
GP[27]
SPI_TX
I2S2_DX
SPI_TX
I2S2_DX
P12PD
LCD_D[12]/UART_RTS/GP[28]/I2S3_CLK
LCD_D[12]
UART_RTS
GP[28]
I2S3_CLK
UART_RTS
UART_RTS
I2S3_CLK
P13PD
LCD_D[13]/UART_CTS/GP[29]/I2S3_FS
LCD_D[13]
UART_CTS
GP[29]
I2S3_FS
UART_CTS
UART_CTS
I2S3_FS
P14PD
LCD_D[14]/UART_RXD/GP[30]/I2S3_RX
LCD_D[14]
UART_RXD
GP[30]
I2S3_RX
UART_RXD
UART_RXD
I2S3_RX
P15PD
LCD_D[15]/UART_TXD/GP[31]/I2S3_DX
LCD_D[15]
UART_TXD
GP[31]
I2S3_DX
UART_TXD
UART_TXD
I2S3_DX
LCD_CS0_E0/SPI_CS0
LCD_CS0_E0
SPI_CS0
LCD_CS0_E0
LCD_CS0_E0
LCD_CS0_E0
LCD_CS0_E0
SPI_CS0
LCD_CS1_E1/SPI_CS1
LCD_CS1_E1
SPI_CS1
LCD_CS1_E1
LCD_CS1_E1
LCD_CS1_E1
LCD_CS1_E1
SPI_CS1
LCD_RW_WRB
SPI_CS2
LCD_RW_WRB
LCD_RW_WRB
LCD_RW_WRB
LCD_RW_WRB
SPI_CS2
LCD_RS
SPI_CS3
LCD_RS
LCD_RS
LCD_RS
LCD_RS
SPI_CS3
LCD_RW_WRB/SPI_CS2
LCD_RS/SPI_CS3
60
MODE 0
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.7.1.2
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
MMC1, I2S1, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP1MODE Bits]
The MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP1MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR)
register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-5.
Table 3-5. MMC1, I2S1, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing
EBSR SP1MODE BITS
PDINHIBR1
REGISTER
BIT FIELDS (1)
(1)
PIN NAME
MODE 0
MODE 1
MODE 2
00
(Reset Default)
01
10
S10PD
MMC1_CLK/I2S1_CLK/GP[6]
MMC1_CLK
I2S1_CLK
GP[6]
S11PD
MMC1_CMD/I2S1_FS/GP[7]
MMC1_CMD
I2S1_FS
GP[7]
S12PD
MMC1_D0/I2S1_DX/GP[8]
MMC1_D0
I2S1_DX
GP[8]
S13PD
MMC1_D1/I2S1_RX/GP[9]
MMC1_D1
I2S1_RX
GP[9]
S14PD
MMC1_D2/GP[10]
MMC1_D2
GP[10]
GP[10]
S15PD
MMC1_D3/GP[11]
MMC1_D3
GP[11]
GP[11]
The pin names with PDINHIBR1 register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this register.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
61
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3.7.1.3
www.ti.com
MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP0MODE Bits]
The MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP0MODE bit fields in the
External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6. MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing
EBSR SP0MODE BITS
PDINHIBR1
REGISTER
BIT FIELDS (1)
(1)
PIN NAME
MODE 0
MODE 1
MODE 2
00
(Reset Default)
01
10
S00PD
MMC0_CLK/I2S0_CLK/GP[0]
MMC0_CLK
I2S0_CLK
GP[0]
S01PD
MMC0_CMD/I2S0_FS/GP[1]
MMC0_CMD
I2S0_FS
GP[1]
S02PD
MMC0_D0/I2S0_DX/GP[2]
MMC0_D0
I2S0_DX
GP[2]
S03PD
MMC0_D1/I2S0_RX/GP[3]
MMC0_D1
I2S0_RX
GP[3]
S04PD
MMC0_D2/GP[4]
MMC0_D2
GP[4]
GP[4]
S05PD
MMC0_D3/GP[5]
MMC0_D3
GP[5]
GP[5]
The pin names with PDINHIBR1 register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this register.
3.7.1.4
EMIF EM_A[20:15] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.Axx_MODE bits]
The EMIF Address and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the A20_MODE, A19_MODE,
A18_MODE, A17_MODE, A16_MODE, and A15_MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register
(EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-7.
Table 3-7. EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing
PIN NAME
Axx_MODE BIT
0
1
EM_A[15]/GP[21]
EM_A[15]
GP[21]
EM_A[16]/GP[22]
EM_A[16]
GP[22]
EM_A[17]/GP[23]
EM_A[17]
GP[23]
EM_A[18]/GP[24]
EM_A[18]
GP[24]
EM_A[19]/GP[25]
EM_A[19]
GP[25]
EM_A[20]/GP[26]
EM_A[20]
GP[26]
62
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
3.8
3.8.1
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Debugging Considerations
Pullup/Pulldown Resistors
Proper board design should ensure that input pins to the device DSP always be at a valid logic level and
not floating. This may be achieved via pullup/pulldown resistors. The DSP features internal pullup (IPU)
and internal pulldown (IPD) resistors on many pins, including all GPIO pins, to eliminate the need, unless
otherwise noted, for external pullup/pulldown resistors.
An external pullup/pulldown resistor may need to be used in the following situations:
• Configuration Pins: An external pullup/pulldown resistor is recommended to set the desired value/state
(see the configuration pins listed in Table 3-2, Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration
Pins). Note that some configuration pins must be connected directly to ground or to a specific supply
voltage.
• Other Input Pins: If the IPU/IPD does not match the desired value/state, use an external
pullup/pulldown resistor to pull the signal to the opposite rail.
For the configuration pins (listed in Table 3-2, Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins), if
they are both routed out and in a high-impedance state (not driven), it is strongly recommended that an
external pullup/pulldown resistor be implemented. In addition, applying external pullup/pulldown resistors
on the configuration pins adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating
modes.
When an external pullup or pulldown resistor is used on a pin, the pin’s internal pullup or pulldown resistor
should be disabled through the Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PDINHIBR1/2/3) [1C17h, 1C18h, and
1C19h, respectively] to minimize power consumption.
Tips for choosing an external pullup/pulldown resistor:
• Consider the total amount of current that may pass through the pullup or pulldown resistor. Make sure
to include the leakage currents of all the devices connected to the net, as well as any internal pullup or
pulldown (IPU/IPD) resistors.
• Decide a target value for the net. For a pulldown resistor, this should be below the lowest VIL level of
all inputs connected to the net. For a pullup resistor, this should be above the highest VIH level of all
inputs on the net. A reasonable choice would be to target the VOL or VOH levels for the logic family of
the limiting device; which, by definition, have margin to the VIL and VIH levels.
• Select a pullup/pulldown resistor with the largest possible value; but, which can still ensure that the net
will reach the target pulled value when maximum current from all devices on the net is flowing through
the resistor. The current to be considered includes leakage current plus, any other internal and
external pullup/pulldown resistors on the net.
• For bidirectional nets, there is an additional consideration which sets a lower limit on the resistance
value of the external resistor. Verify that the resistance is small enough that the weakest output buffer
can drive the net to the opposite logic level (including margin).
• Remember to include tolerances when selecting the resistor value.
• For pullup resistors, also remember to include tolerances on the DVDD rail.
For most systems, a 1-kΩ resistor can be used to oppose the IPU/IPD while meeting the above criteria.
Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application.
For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can be used to compliment the IPU/IPD on the configuration pins
while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific
application.
For more detailed information on input current (II), and the low-/high-level input voltages (VIL and VIH) for
the device DSP, see Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply
Voltage and Operating Temperature.
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the peripheral/system-specific terminal
functions table in Section 2.5.
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
63
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
3.8.2
www.ti.com
Bus Holders
The device has special I/O bus-holder structures to ensure pins are not left floating when CVDD power is
removed while I/O power is applied. When CVDD is "ON", the bus-holders are disabled and the internal
pullups or pulldowns, if applicable, function normally. But when CVDD is "OFF" and the I/O supply is "ON",
the bus-holders become enabled and any applicable internal pullups and pulldowns are disabled.
The bus-holders are weak drivers on the pin and, for as long as CVDD is "OFF" and I/O power is "ON",
they hold the last state on the pin. If an external device is strongly driving the device I/O pin to the
opposite state then the bus-holder will flip state to match the external driver and DC current will stop.
This bus-holder feature prevents unnecessary power consumption when CVDD is "OFF"and I/O supply is
"ON". For example, current caused by undriven pins (input buffer oscillation) and/or DC current flowing
through pullups or pulldowns.
If external pullup or pulldown resistors are implemented, then care should be taken that those
pullup/pulldown resistors can exceed the internal bus-holder's max current and thereby cause the busholder to flip state to match the state of the external pullup or pulldown. Otherwise, DC current will flow
unnecessarily. When CVDD power is applied, the bus holders are disabled (for further details on bus
holders, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down).
3.8.3
CLKOUT Pin
For debug purposes, the DSP includes a CLKOUT pin which can be used to tap different clocks within the
clock generator. The SRC bits of the CLKOUT Control Source Register (CCSSR) can be used to specify
the source for the CLKOUT pin.
Note: The bootloader disables the CLKOUT pin via CLKOFF bit in the ST3_55 CPU register.
For more information on the ST3_55 CPU register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide
(literature number: SWPU073).
64
Device Configuration
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
4 Device Operating Conditions
For the device maximum operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool
Nomenclature.
4.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless
Otherwise Noted) (1)
Supply voltage ranges:
Input and Output voltage ranges:
Operating case temperature ranges, Tc:
Digital Core (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3) (2)
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
I/O, 1.8 V, 2.5 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF,
DVDDRTC) 3.3V USB supplies USB PHY (USB_VDDOSC,
USB_VDDPLL, USB_VDDA3P3) (2)
–0.5 V to 4.2 V
LDOI
–0.5 V to 4.2 V
Analog, 1.3 V (VDDA_PLL, USB_VDDA1P3, VDDA_ANA) (2)
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
VI I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or
USB_VDDPLL or USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source
–0.5 V to 4.2 V
VO I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or
USB_VDDPLLor USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source
–0.5 V to 4.2 V
RTC_XI and RTC_XO
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
USB_VBUS Input
–0.5 V to 5.5 V
VI and VO, GPAIN[0]
–0.5 V to 4.2 V
VI and VO, GPAIN[3:1]
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
VO, BG_CAP
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
ANA_LDOO (3)
–0.5 V to 1.7 V
Commercial Temperature (default)
-10°C to 70°C
Industrial Temperature (SYSCLK ≤ 120MHz)
-40°C to 85°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg
(default)
Device Operating Life
Power-On Hours (POH)
DSP Operating Frequency
(SYSCLK ) ≤100 MHz
<70 °C
100,000 POH
≥70 °C - ≤85 °C
100,000 POH
DSP Operating Frequency
(SYSCLK):
>100 MHz - ≤120 MHz
<70 °C
100,000 POH
DSP Operating Frequency
(SYSCLK):
>120 MHz - ≤150 MHz
<70 °C
(4)
ESD Stress Voltage (5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
≥70 °C - ≤85 °C
80,000 POH
100,000 POH
≥70 °C - ≤85 °C
Human Body Model (HBM) (6)
Charged Device Model (CDM)
(1)
–65°C to 150°C
34,000 POH
> 1000 V
(7)
> 250 V
Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
On this device DSP_LDOO and USB_LDOO are not supported and should be left unconnected.
This information is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or modify the warranty provided under TI’s standard terms
and conditions for TI semiconductor products.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) to measure device sensitivity/immunity to damage caused by electrostatic discharges into the device.
Level listed is the passing level per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001-2010. JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500 V HBM allows safe
manufacturing with a standard ESD control process, and manufacturing with less than 500 V HBM is possible if necessary precautions
are taken. Pins listed as 1000 V may actually have higher performance.
Level listed is the passing level per EIA-JEDEC JESD22-C101E. JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250 V CDM allows safe
manufacturing with a standard ESD control process. Pins listed as 250 V may actually have higher performance.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
65
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
4.2
www.ti.com
Recommended Operating Conditions
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
0.998
1.05
1.15
V
100 or 120 MHz
1.24
1.3
1.43
V
150 MHz
1.33
1.4
1.47
V
1.47
V
60 or 75 MHz
CVDD
Core Supplies
CVDDRTC
Supply voltage, RTC and RTC OSC
USB_VDD1P3
Supply voltage, Digital USB
1.24
1.3
1.43
V
USB_VDDA1P3
Supply voltage, 1.3 V Analog USB
1.24
1.3
1.43
V
VDDA_ANA
Supply voltage, 1.3 V SAR and Pwr Mgmt
1.24
1.3
1.43
V
150 MHz
1.33
1.4
1.47
32.768 KHz
0.998
60/75/100/120MHz
1.24
1.3
1.43
VDDA_PLL
Supply voltage, System PLL
USB_VDDPLL
Supply voltage, 3.3 V USB PLL
2.97
3.3
3.63
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V
2.97
3.3
3.63
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V
2.48
2.75
3.02
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V
2.25
2.5
2.75
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V
1.65
1.8
1.98
V
USB_VDDOSC
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V USB OSC
2.97
3.3
3.63
V
USB_VDDA3P3
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY
2.97
3.3
3.63
V
LDOI
Supply voltage, Analog Pwr Mgmt and LDO Inputs
3.6
V
VSS
Supply ground, Digital I/O
VSSRTC
Supply ground, RTC
USB_VSSOSC
Supply ground, USB OSC
USB_VSSPLL
Supply ground, USB PLL
USB_VSSA3P3
Supply ground, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY
USB_VSSA1P3
Supply ground, USB 1.3 V Analog USB PHY
0
V
USB_VSSREF
Supply ground, USB Reference Current
VSSA_PLL
Supply ground, System PLL
USB_VSS1P3
Supply ground, 1.3 V Digital USB PHY
VSSA_ANA
Supply ground, SAR and Pwr Mgmt
DVDDIO
DVDDEMIF
DVDDRTC
I/O Supplies
GND
Supply voltage, Digital Core
1.8
0
0
V
VIH
(1)
High-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O (except
GPAIN[3:0] pins) (2)
0.7 * DVDD
DVDD + 0.3
V
VIL
(1)
Low-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O (except
GPAIN[3:0] pins) (2)
-0.3
0.3 * DVDD
V
Input voltage, GPAIN0 pin (3)
-0.3
3.6
V
Input voltage, GPAIN[3:1] pins
-0.3
VDDA_ANA + 0.3
V
Default
(Commercial)
-10
70
°C
(Industrial)
VIN
Tc
Operating case temperature
FSYSCLK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
66
DSP Operating Frequency (SYSCLK)
-40
85
1.05 V
0
60 or 75 (4)
MHz
°C
1.3 V
0
100 or 120 (4)
MHz
1.4 V
0
150 (4)
MHz
DVDD refers to the pin I/O supply voltage. To determine the I/O supply voltage for each pin, see Section 2.5, Terminal Functions.
The I2C pin SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pin could potentially draw current when the DVDDIO is powered
down. Due to the fact that different voltage devices can be connected to I2C bus and the I2C inputs are LVCMOS, the level of logic 0
(low) and logic 1 (high) are not fixed and depend on DVDDIO.
The GNDON bit in the SARPINCTRL register should be set to "1" before SAR channels 0, 1, or 2 are enabled via the CHSEL bit in the
SARCTRL register, when VIN greater than VDDA_ANA.
For the device maximum operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
4.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER
VOH
VOL
VHYS
TEST CONDITIONS
(1)
High speed: USB_DN and
USB_DP (2)
360
440
V
High-level output voltage,
GPAIN[3:1] pins
IO = IOH
0.8 *
VDDA_ANA
V
Full speed: USB_DN and
USB_DP (2)
0.0
0.3
V
High speed: USB_DN and
USB_DP (2)
–10
10
mV
Low-level output voltage, 3.3,
2.75, 2.5, 1.8V I/O (except I2C
and GPAIN[3:0] pins)
IO = IOL
Low-level output voltage, I2C
pins (3)
VDD > 2 V, IOL = 3 mA
Low-level output voltage,
GPAIN[3:0] pins
IO = IOL
Input hysteresis (4)
0
Input current [DC] (except
WAKEUP, I2C, and GPAIN[3:0]
pins)
Input current [DC] (except
WAKEUP, I2C, and GPAIN[3:0]
pins)
Input current [DC], ALL pins
(7)
(8)
(9)
0.4
V
0.2 * VDDA_ANA
V
162
mV
141
mV
DVDD = 1.8 V
122
1.24
LDOI = VMIN
1.3
mV
1.43
4
V
mA
-5
+5
μA
DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pullup enabled (8)
-59 to 161
μA
DVDD = 2.5 V with internal pullup enabled (8)
-31 to -93
μA
DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pullup enabled (8)
-14 to -44
-5
μA
+5
μA
DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pulldown enabled (8)
52 to 158
μA
DVDD = 2.5 V with internal pulldown enabled (8)
27 to 83
μA
DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pulldown enabled (8)
11 to 35
μA
VI = VSS to DVDD with internal pullups and pulldowns
disabled.
-5
All Pins (except USB, EMIF, CLKOUT, and
GPAIN[3:0] pins)
-4
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V
-6
mA
DVDD = 1.8 V
-5
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V
-6
mA
DVDD = 1.8 V
-4
mA
DVDD = VDDA_ANA = 1.3 V,
External Regulator (9)
-4
mA
(GPAIN0 is open-drain DV = V
DD
DDA_ANA = 1.3 V,
and cannot drive high) Internal
Regulator (9)
-100
μA
CLKOUT pin
GPAIN[3:1] pins
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
V
DVDD = 2.5 V
EMIF pins
High-level output current [DC]
0.2 * DVDD
DVDD = 3.3 V
Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled
IOH
mV
0.8 * DVDD
Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled
(7)
V
IO = IOH
ANA_LDO shutdown current (5)
IIH/
IIL (7)
UNIT
High-level output voltage, 3.3,
2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O (except
GPAIN[3:0] pins)
ISD
IIHPD
MAX
USB_VDDA3P3
ANA_LDOO voltage
(6) (7)
TYP
2.8
VLDO
IILPU (6) (7)
MIN
Full speed: USB_DN and
USB_DP (2)
+5
μA
For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or TYP, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
The USB I/Os adhere to the Universal Bus Specification Revision 2.0 (USB2.0 spec).
VDD is the voltage to which the I2C bus pullup resistors are connected.
Applies to all input pins except WAKEUP, I2C pins, GPAIN[3:0], RTC_XI, and USB_MXI.
ISD is the amount of current the LDO is ensured to deliver before shutting down to protect itself.
II applies to input-only pins and bi-directional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bi-directional pins, II
indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
When CVDD power is "ON", the pin bus-holders are disabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior
When Core Power (CVDD) is Down.
Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
When the ANA_LDO supplies VDDA_ANA, it is not recommended to use the GPAIN[3:1] signals for general-purpose outputs (driving high).
The ISD parameter of the ANA_LDO is too low to drive any realistic load on the GPAIN[3:1] pins while also supplying the PLL through
VDDA_PLL and the SAR through VDDA_ANA.
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
67
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (continued)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
(1)
MIN
TYP
All Pins (except USB, EMIF, CLKOUT, and
GPAIN[3:0] pins)
EMIF pins
IOL
(7)
Low-level output current [DC]
CLKOUT pin
GPAIN[3:0]
IOZ (10)
I/O Off-state output current
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V
+6
mA
DVDD = 1.8 V
+5
mA
DVDD = 3.3 V
+6
mA
DVDD = 1.8 V
+4
mA
DVDD = VDDA_ANA = 1.3 V,
external regulator
+4
mA
DVDD = VDDA_ANA = 1.3 V,
internal regulator (9)
+4
mA
μA
All Pins (except USB and GPAIN[3:0])
-10
+10
GPAIN[3:0] pins
-10
+10
μA
2.2
mA
1.6
mA
1.4
mA
0.72
mA
Bus Holder pull low current when Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V
CVDD is powered "OFF"
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V
IOHBH (11)
Bus Holder pull high current
when CVDD is powered "OFF"
UNIT
+4
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V
IOLBH (11)
MAX
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V
-1.3
mA
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V
-0.97
mA
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V
-0.83
mA
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V
-0.46
mA
Active, CVDD = 1.4 V, DSP clock = 150 MHz, Clock
source = external 12MHz on CLKIN pin
0.27
mW/MHz
0.22
mW/MHz
0.15
mW/MHz
0.26
mW/MHz
0.22
mW/MHz
0.14
mW/MHz
0.72
mW
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% ADD
(typical sine wave data switching)
Active, CVDD = 1.3 V, DSP clock = 100 or 120 MHz,
Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% ADD
(typical sine wave data switching)
Active, CVDD = 1.05 V, DSP clock = 60 or 75 MHz,
Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% ADD
(typical data switching)
P
Core (CVDD) supply power
(12)
Active, CVDD = 1.4 V, DSP clock = 150 MHz, Clock
source = external 12MHz on CLKIN pin
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% NOP
(typical sine wave data switching)
Active, CVDD = 1.3 V, DSP clock = 100 or 120 MHz,
Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% NOP
(typical sine wave data switching)
Active, CVDD = 1.05 V, DSP clock = 60 or 75 MHz,
Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% NOP
(typical data switching)
Standby, CVDD = 1.4 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = external 12MHz on CLKIN pin
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM and SARAM in active
mode
(10) IOZ applies to output-only pins, indicating off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
(11) This parameter specifies the maximum strength of the Bus Holder and is needed to calculate the minimum strength of external pull-ups
and pull-downs.
(12) Measured under the following conditions:
• At room temperature using units representative of a typical process.
• I/O pins are properly terminated.
The actual current draw varies across manufacturing processes and is highly application-dependent.
For more details on core and I/O activity, as well as information relevant to board power supply design,
see Estimating Power Consumption on the TMS320C5504/05/14/15/32/33/34/35 DSPs (literature number SPRABM0).
68
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (continued)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
0.44
mW
0.26
mW
0.66
mW
0.40
mW
0.23
mW
0.53
mW
0.28
mW
0.15
mW
VDDA_PLL = 1.4 V
Room Temp (25 °C), Phase detector = 170 kHz,
VCO = 150 MHz
1.2
mA
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V
Room Temp (25 °C), Phase detector = 170 kHz,
VCO = 120 MHz
0.7
mA
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM and SARAM in active
mode
Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM and SARAM in active
mode
P
Core (CVDD) supply power
(12)
Standby, CVDD = 1.4 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = external 12MHz on CLKIN pin
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in retention and
SARAM in active mode
Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in retention and
SARAM in active mode
Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in retention and
SARAM in active mode
Standby, CVDD = 1.4 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = external 12MHz on CLKIN pin
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in active mode and
SARAM in retention
Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in active mode and
SARAM in retention
Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock
source = RTC on-chip Oscillator
Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in active mode and
SARAM in retention
Analog PLL (VDDA_PLL) supply
current
I
SAR Analog (VDDA_ANA) supply
current
VDDA_ANA = 1.3 V, SAR clock = 2 MHz, Temp (70 °C)
1
mA
CI
Input capacitance
4
pF
Co
Output capacitance
4
pF
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
69
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
5.1
Parameter Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see Note)
4.0 pF
Device Pin
(see Note)
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects must be
taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is
intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 5-1. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
5.1.1
1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, and 3.3-V Signal Transition Levels
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL
MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)
Figure 5-2. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
5.1.2
3.3-V Signal Transition Rates
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
5.1.3
Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routing. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing
Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.
5.2
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner.
70
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Power Supplies
The device includes four core voltage-level supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3), and
several I/O supplies (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3), as well as several
analog supplies (LDOI, VDDA_PLL, VDDA_ANA, and USB_VDDPLL).
Note: CVDDRTC must be externally powered. None of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC.
Some TI power-supply devices include features that facilitate power sequencing—for example, Auto-Track
and Slow-Start/Enable features. For more information regarding TI's power management products and
suggested devices to power TI DSPs, visit www.ti.com/processorpower.
5.3.1
Power-Supply Sequencing
The device includes four core voltage-level supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3), and
several I/O supplies including DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3.
Note: the external reset signal on the RESET pin must be held low until all of the power supplies reach
their operating voltage conditions.
The I/O design allows either the core supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3) or the I/O
supplies (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3) to be powered up for an indefinite
period of time while the other supply is not powered if the following constraints are met:
1. All maximum ratings and recommended operating conditions are satisfied.
2. All warnings about exposure to maximum rated and recommended conditions, particularly junction
temperature are satisfied. These apply to power transitions as well as normal operation.
3. Bus contention while core supplies are powered must be limited to 100 hours over the projected
lifetime of the device.
4. Bus contention while core supplies are powered down does not violate the absolute maximum ratings.
If the USB subsystem is used, the subsystem must be powered up in the following sequence:
1. USB_VDDA1P3 and USB_VDD1P3
2. USB_VDDA3P3
3. USB_VBUS
If the USB subsystem is not used, the following can be powered off:
• USB Core
– USB_VDD1P3
– USB_VDDA1P3
• USB PHY and I/O Level Supplies
– USB_VDDOSC
– USB_VDDA3P3
– USB_VDDPLL
A supply bus is powered up when the voltage is within the recommended operating range. It is powered
down when the voltage is below that range, either stable or while in transition.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
71
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.3.2
www.ti.com
Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down
With some exceptions (listed below), all digital I/O pins on the device have special features to allow
powering down of the Digital Core Domain (CVDD) without causing I/O contentions or floating inputs at the
pins (see Figure 5-3). The device asserts the internal signal called HHV high when power has been
removed from the Digital Core Domain (CVDD). Asserting the internal HHV signal causes the following
conditions to occur in any order:
• All output pin strong drivers to go to the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state
• Weak bus holders to be enabled to hold the pin at a valid high or low
• The internal pullups or pulldowns (IPUs/IPDs) on the I/O pins will be disabled
The exception pins that do not have this special feature are:
• Pins driven by the CVDDRTC Power Domain [This power domain is "Always On"; therefore, the pins
driven by CVDDRTC do not need these special features]:
– RTC_XI, RTC_XO, RTC_CLKOUT, and WAKEUP
• USB Pins:
– USB_DP, USB_DM, USB_R1, USB_VBUS, USB_MXI, and USB_MXO
• Pins for the Analog Block:
– GPAIN[3:0], DSP_LDO_EN, and BG_CAP
DVDD
Y
PAD
A
GZ
hhvgz
HHV
OR
HHV
PI
OR
hhvpi
HHV
Figure 5-3. Bus Holder I/O Circuit
NOTE
Figure 5-3 shows both a pullup and pulldown but pins only have one, not both.
PI = Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit
GZ = Output Enable (active low)
HHV = Described in Section 5.3.2
72
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.3.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Power-Supply Design Considerations
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O,
VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL (which can share the same PCB power plane), and ground; all bypassed with
high–quality low–ESL/ESR capacitors.
5.3.4
Power-Supply Decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place capacitors (caps) as close as
possible to the device. These caps need to be no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance from the device
power pins to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better but need to be evaluated
from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the decoupling
capacitors, therefore physically smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest available
capacitance value.
Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order
of 10 μF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be
placed outside of the BGA footprint.
As with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product's production
lifetime should be considered.
The recommended decoupling capacitance for the DSP core supplies should be 1 μF in parallel with 0.01μF capacitor per supply pin.
5.3.5
LDO Input Decoupling
The LDO inputs should follow the same decoupling guidelines as other power-supply pins above.
5.3.6
LDO Output Decoupling
The LDO circuits implement a voltage feedback control system which has been designed to optimize gain
and stability tradeoffs. As such, there are design assumptions for the amount of capacitance on the LDO
outputs. For proper device operation, the following external decoupling capacitors should be used when
the on-chip LDOs are enabled:
• ANA_LDOO– 1μF
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
73
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.4
www.ti.com
External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins
The device DSP includes two options to provide an external clock input to the system clock generator:
• Use the on-chip real-time clock (RTC) oscillator with an external 32.768-kHz crystal connected to the
RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins.The system clock generator can generate up to 134 MHz with the RTC
oscillator input (Note: CVDD must be 1.4 V when SYSCLK > 120 MHz). To generate higher frequency
(SYSCLK > 134 MHz), CLKIN must be selected as the clock source of the system clock generator.
• Use an external 11.2896-, 12.0-, or 12.288-MHz LVCMOS clock input fed into the CLKIN pin that
operates at the same voltage as the DVDDIO supply (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, or 3.3-V).
The CLK_SEL pin determines which input is used as the clock source for the system clock generator. For
more details, see Section 3.5.1, Device and Peripheral Configurations at Device Reset. The crystal for the
RTC oscillator is not required if CLKIN is used as the system reference clock; however, the RTC must still
be powered by an external power source. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. The RTC
registers starting at I/O address 1900h will not be accessible without an RTC clock. This includes the RTC
Power Management Register which provides control to WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Section 5.4.1,
Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal provides more details on using the RTC
on-chip oscillator with an external crystal. Section 5.4.2, CLKIN Pin With LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
provides details on using an external LVCMOS-compatible clock input fed into the CLKIN pin.
Additionally, the USB requires a reference clock generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 12MHz external crystal connected to the USB_MXI and USB_MXO pins. The USB reference clock is not
required if the USB peripheral is not being used. Section 5.4.3, USB On-Chip Oscillator With External
Crystal provides details on using the USB on-chip oscillator with an external crystal.
5.4.1
Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal
The on-chip oscillator requires an external 32.768-kHz crystal connected across the RTC_XI and RTC_XO
pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-4. The external crystal load capacitors must be
connected only to the RTC oscillator ground pin (VSSRTC). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). Position
the VSS lead on the board between RTC_XI and RTC_XO as a shield to reduce direct capacitance
between RTC_XI and RTC_XO leads on the board. The CVDDRTC pin can be connected to the same
power supply as CVDD , or may be connected to a different supply that meets the recommended operating
conditions (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions), if desired.
RTC_XI
RTC_XO
VSSRTC
VSS
CVDDRTC
CVDD
Crystal
32.768 kHz
C1
C2
0.998-1.43 V
1.05/1.3/1.4 V
Figure 5-4. 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator
74
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
The crystal should be in fundamental-mode function, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective
series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-1. The load capacitors, C1 and C2, are the total capacitance
of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitors values are usually
approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal
manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied. All discrete
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the
associated oscillator pins (RTC_XI and RTC_XO) and to the VSSRTC pin.
CL =
C1 C2
(C1 + C2 )
Table 5-1. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator
PARAMETER
MIN
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 32.768-kHz) (1)
0.2
Oscillation frequency
NOM
MAX
UNIT
2
sec
32.768
kHz
ESR
100
kΩ
Maximum shunt capacitance
1.6
pF
Maximum crystal drive
1.0
μW
(1)
The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal.
5.4.2
CLKIN Pin With LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input (Optional)
Note: If CLKIN is not used, the pin must be tied low.
A LVCMOS-compatible clock input of a frequency less than 24 MHz can be fed into the CLKIN pin for use
by the DSP system clock generator. The external connections are shown in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
The bootloader assumes that the CLKIN pin is connected to the LVCMOS-compatible clock source with a
frequency of 11.2896-, 12.0-, or 12.288-MHz. These frequencies were selected to support boot mode
peripheral speeds of 500 KHz for SPI and 400 KHz for I2C. These clock frequencies are achieved by
dividing the CLKIN value by 25 for SPI and by 32 for I2C. If a faster external clock is input, then these
boot modes will run at faster clock speeds. If the system design utilizes faster peripherals or these boot
modes are not used, CLKIN values higher than 12.288 MHz can be used. Note: The CLKIN pin operates
at the same voltage as the DVDDIO supply (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, or 3.3-V).
In this configuration the RTC oscillator can be optionally disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and
RTC_XO to ground (VSS). However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled the RTC registers starting at I/O
address 1900h will not be accessible. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides
control to WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Note: the RTC must still be powered by an external power
source even if the RTC oscillator is disabled. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC.
For more details on the RTC on-chip oscillator, see Section 5.4.1, Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip
Oscillator With External Crystal.
CLKIN
RTC_XI
RTC_XO
VSSRTC
CVDDRTC
VSS
CVDD
Crystal
32.768 kHz
C1
C2
0.998-1.43 V
1.05/1.3/1.4 V
Figure 5-5. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With RTC Oscillator Enabled
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
75
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
CLKIN
RTC_XI
www.ti.com
CVDDRTC
VSSRTC
VSS
RTC_XO
CVDD
1.05/1.3/1.4 V
0.998-1.43 V
Figure 5-6. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With RTC Oscillator Disabled
5.4.3
USB On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal (Optional)
When using the USB, the USB on-chip oscillator requires an external 12-MHz crystal connected across
the USB_MXI and USB_MXO pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-7. The external
crystal load capacitors must be connected only to the USB oscillator ground pin (USB_VSSOSC). Do not
connect to board ground (VSS). The USB_VDDOSC pin can be connected to the same power supply as
USB_VDDA3P3.
The USB on-chip oscillator can be permanently disabled, via tie-offs, if the USB peripheral is not being
used. To permanently disable the USB oscillator, connect the USB_MXI pin to ground (VSS) and leave the
USB_MXO pin unconnected. The USB oscillator power pins (USB_VDDOSC and USB_VSSOSC) should also
be connected to ground, as shown in Figure 5-8.
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the
USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see
Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the
USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS).
USB_MXI
USB_MXO
USB_VSSOSC
USB_VDDOSC
VSS
USB_VDDA3P3
Crystal
12 MHz
C1
C2
3.3 V
3.3 V
Figure 5-7. 12-MHz USB Oscillator
76
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
USB_MXI
USB_MXO
USB_VSSOSC
USB_VDDOSC
VSS
USB_VDDA3P3
Figure 5-8. Connections when USB Oscillator is Permanently Disabled
The crystal should be in fundamental-mode operation, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective
series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-2. The load capacitors, C1 and C2 are the total capacitance
of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitor value is usually
approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal
manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation below is satisfied. All discrete
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the
associated oscillator pins (USB_MXI and USB_MXO) and to the USB_VSSOSC pin.
CL =
C1 C2
(C1 + C2 )
Table 5-2. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 12-MHz USB Oscillator
PARAMETER
MIN
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 12 MHz) (1)
Oscillation frequency
(2)
Maximum shunt capacitance
Maximum crystal drive
(1)
(2)
MAX
10
12
ESR
Frequency stability
NOM
0.100
UNIT
ms
MHz
100
Ω
±100
ppm
5
pF
330
μW
The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal.
If the USB is used, a 12-MHz, ±100-ppm crystal is recommended.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
77
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.5
www.ti.com
Clock PLLs
The device DSP uses a software-programmable PLL to generate frequencies required by the CPU, DMA,
and peripherals. The reference clock for the PLL is taken from either the CLKIN pin or the RTC on-chip
oscillator (as specified through the CLK_SEL pin).
5.5.1
PLL Device-Specific Information
There is a minimum and maximum operating frequency for CLKIN, PLLOUT, and the system clock
(SYSCLK). The system clock generator must be configured not to exceed any of these constraints
documented in this section (certain combinations of external clock inputs, internal dividers, and PLL
multiply ratios are not supported).
Table 5-3. PLL Clock Frequency Ranges
CLOCK SIGNAL NAME
CVDD = 1.05 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V
MIN
RTC Clock
PLLOUT
SYSCLK
PLL_LOCKTIME
(1)
(2)
MIN
11.2896
12
12.288
CLKIN (1)
PLLIN
MAX
CVDD = 1.3 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.4 V
MAX
MIN
11.2896
12
12.288
32.768
32.768
UNIT
MAX
11.2896
12
12.288
MHz
32.768
KHz
32.768
170
32.768
170
32.768
170
KHz
60
120
60
120
60
150 (2)
MHz
60 or 75
0.032768
100 or
120
0.032768
150 (2)
MHz
4
ms
0.032768
4
4
These CLKIN values are used when the CLK_SEL pin = 1.
When PLLOUT > 134 MHz, CLKIN must be used as the source of PLLIN.
The PLL has lock time requirements that must be followed. The PLL lock time is the amount of time
needed for the PLL to complete its phase-locking sequence.
5.5.2
Clock PLL Considerations With External Clock Sources
If the CLKIN pin is used to provide the reference clock to the PLL, to minimize the clock jitter a single
clean power supply should power both the device and the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum
CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see
Section 5.5.3, Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks).
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock
source must meet the device requirements in this data manual (see Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics
Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature, and Section 5.5.3, Clock
PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks).
78
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.5.3
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks)
Table 5-4. Timing Requirements for CLKIN (1)
CVDD = 1.05 V
NO.
1
MIN
tc(CLKI
N)
2
tw(CLKI
tw(CLKI
tt(CLKIN
MIN
NOM
CVDD = 1.4 V
MAX
MIN
88.577,
83.333,
or
81.380
NOM
MAX
88.577,
83.333,
or
81.380
UNI
T
ns
Pulse width, CLKIN high
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
ns
Pulse width, CLKIN low
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
0.466 *
tc(CLKIN)
ns
NL)
4
(see Figure 5-9)
CVDD = 1.3 V
MAX
88.577,
83.333,
or
81.380
Cycle time, external clock
driven on CLKIN
NH)
3
NOM
(2)
Transition time, CLKIN
4
4
4
ns
)
(1)
(2)
The CLKIN frequency and PLL multiply factor should be chosen such that the resulting clock frequency is within the specific range for
CPU operating frequency.
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
1
4
1
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 5-9. CLKIN Timing
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
79
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-5. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT (1)
(see Figure 5-10)
NO
.
CVDD = 1.05 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V
PARAMETER
CVDD = 1.3 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V
(2)
CVDD = 1.4 V
VDDA_PLL = 1.4 V
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
P
16.67 or
13.33 (3)
P
10 or
8.3 (3)
P
6.66 (3)
1
tc(CLKOUT)
Cycle time, CLKOUT
2
tw(CLKOUTH)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT high
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
ns
3
tw(CLKOUTL)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT low
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
0.466 *
tc(CLKOUT)
ns
4
tt(CLKOUTR)
Transition time (rise),
CLKOUT (4)
5
5
5
ns
5
tt(CLKOUTF)
Transition time (fall),
CLKOUT (4)
5
5
5
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when SYSCLK frequency is 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Value is maximum device frequency dependant (for more information, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool
Nomenclature).
Transition time is measured with the slew rate set to FAST and DVDDIO = 1.65 V. (For more detailed information, see the Section 3.6.5,
Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [1C16h].).
2
5
1
CLKOUT
3
4
Figure 5-10. CLKOUT Timing
80
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.6
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller
The DMA controller is used to move data among internal memory, external memory, and peripherals
without intervention from the CPU and in the background of CPU operation.
The DSP includes a total of four DMA controllers. Aside from the DSP resources they can access, all four
DMA controllers are identical.
The DMA controller has the following features:
• Operation that is independent of the CPU.
• Four channels, which allow the DMA controller to keep track of the context of four independent block
transfers.
• Event synchronization. DMA transfers in each channel can be made dependent on the occurrence of
selected events.
• An interrupt for each channel. Each channel can send an interrupt to the CPU on completion of the
programmed transfer.
• Ping-Pong mode allows the DMA controller to keep track of double buffering context without CPU
intervention.
• A dedicated clock idle domain. The four device DMA controllers can be put into a low-power state by
independently turning off their input clocks.
5.6.1
DMA Channel Synchronization Events
The DMA controllers allow activity in their channels to be synchronized to selected events. The DSP
supports 20 separate synchronization events and each channel can be tied to separate sync events
independent of the other channels. Synchronization events are selected by programming the CHnEVT
field in the DMAn channel event source registers (DMAnCESR1 and DMAnCESR2).
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
81
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.7
www.ti.com
Reset
The device has two main types of reset: hardware reset and software reset.
Hardware reset is responsible for initializing all key states of the device. It occurs whenever the RESET
pin is asserted .
There are two types of software reset: the CPU's software reset instruction and the software control of the
peripheral reset signals. For more information on the CPU's software reset instruction, see the
TMS320C55x CPU 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). In all the device
documentation, all references to "reset" refer to hardware reset. Any references to software reset will
explicitly state software reset.
The device RTC has one additional type of reset, a power-on-reset (POR) for the registers in the RTC
core. This POR monitors the voltage of CVDDRTC and resets the RTC registers when power is first applied
to the RTC core.
5.7.1
RTC Power-On Reset (POR)
The RTC POR ensures that the flip-flops in the CVDDRTC power domain have an initial state upon
powerup. In particular, the RTCNOPWR register is reset by this POR and is used to indicate that the RTC
time registers need to be initialized with the current time and date when power is first applied.
5.7.2
Reset Pin (RESET)
The device can receive an external reset signal on the RESET pin.
Once the hardware reset is applied, the system clock generator is enabled and the DSP starts the boot
sequence. For more information on the boot sequence, see Section 3.4, Boot Sequence.
5.7.3
Pin Behavior at Reset
During normal operation, pins are controlled by the respective peripheral selected in the External Bus
Selection Register (EBSR) register. During power-on reset and reset, the behavior of the output pins
changes and is categorized as follows:
82
•
High Group: EM_CS4, EM_CS5, EM_CS2, EM_CS3, EM_DQM0, EM_DQM1, EM_OE, EM_WE,
LCD_RS/SPI_CS3, EM_SDCAS, EM_SDRAS
•
Low Group: LCD_EN_RDB/SPI_CLK, EM_R/W, MMC0_CLK/I2S0_CLK/GP[0],
MMC1_CLK/I2S1_CLK/GP[6], EM_SDCLK
•
Z Group: EM_D[15:0], EMU[1:0], SCL, SDA, LCD_D[0]/SPI_RX, LCD_D[1]/SPI_TX,
LCD_D[10]/I2S2_RX/GP[20]/SPI_RX, LCD_D[11]/I2S2_DX/GP[27]/SPI_TX,
LCD_D[12]/I2S2_RTS/GP[28]/I2S3_CLK, LCD_D[13]/I2S2_CTS/GP[29]/I2S3_RS,
LCD_D[14]/I2S2_RXD/GP[30]/I2S3_RX, LCD_D[15]/I2S2_TXD/GP[31]/I2S3_DX, LCD_D[2]/GP[12],
LCD_D[3]/GP[13], LCD_D[4]/GP[14], LCD_D[5]/GP[15], LCD_D[6]/GP[16], LCD_D[7]/GP[17],
LCD_D[8]/I2S2_CLK/GP[18]/SPI_CLK,LCD_D[9]/I2S2_FS/GP[19]/SPI_CS0, RTC_CLKOUT,
MMC0_CMD/I2S0_FS/GP[1], MMC0_D0/I2S0_DX/GP[2], MMC0_D1/I2S0_RX/GP[3],
MMC0_D2/GP[4], MMC0_D3/GP[5], MMC1_CMD/I2S1_FS/GP[7], MMC1_D0/2S1_DX/GP[8],
MMC1_D1/I2S1_RX/GP[9], MMC1_D2/GP[10], MMC1_D3/GP[11], TDO, WAKEUP
•
CLKOUT Group: CLKOUT, LCD_CS1_E1/SPI_CS1
•
SYNCH 0→1 Group: LCD_CS0_E0/SPI_CS0, LCD_RW_WRB/SPI_CS2, EM_SDCKE
•
SYNCH 1→0 Group: EM_CS0, EM_CS1
•
SYNCH X→1 Group: EM_BA[1:0], XF
•
SYNCH X→0 Group: EM_A[20:0]
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.7.4
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Reset Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-6. Timing Requirements for Reset (1) (see Figure 5-11)
CVDD = 1.05 V
NO.
1
(1)
MIN
tw(RSTL)
Pulse duration, RESET low
MAX
3P
CVDD = 1.3 V
MIN
MAX
3P
CVDD = 1.4 V
MIN
MAX
3P
UNIT
ns
P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, if SYSCLK = 12 MHz, use P = 83.3 ns. In IDLE3 mode the system clock generator is
bypassed and the SYSCLK frequency is equal to either CLKIN or the RTC clock frequency depending on CLK_SEL.
RESET
LOW Group
HIGH Group
Z Group
SYNCH X ® 0
Group
SYNCH X® 1
Group
SYNCH 0® 1
Group
SYNCH 1® 0
Group
CLKOUT
65536 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 1,
32 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 0
Figure 5-11. Reset Timing Requirements
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
83
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.8
www.ti.com
Interrupts and XF
The device has a number of interrupts to service the needs of its peripherals. The interrupts can be
selectively enabled or disabled.
5.8.1
Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-7. Timing Requirements for Interrupts (1) (see Figure 5-12)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
MIN
(1)
UNIT
MAX
1
tw(INTH)
Pulse duration, interrupt high CPU active
2P
ns
2
tw(INTL)
Pulse duration, interrupt low CPU active
2P
ns
P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. For example, when the
CPU core is clocked att 120 MHz, use P = 8.3 ns.
1
INTx
2
Figure 5-12. External Interrupt Timings
5.8.2
Wake-Up From IDLE Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-8. Timing Requirements for Wake-Up From IDLE (see Figure 5-13)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
MIN
1
tw(WKPL)
Pulse duration, WAKEUP or INTx low, SYSCLKDIS = 1
UNIT
MAX
30.5
µs
Table 5-9. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For Wake-Up From
IDLE (1) (2) (3) (4) (see Figure 5-13)
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
PARAMETER
MIN
2
td(WKEVTH-C
KLGEN)
84
UNIT
MAX
IDLE3 Mode with SYSCLKDIS = 1,
WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL =
1
D
ns
Delay time, WAKEUP pulse complete to
IDLE3 Mode with SYSCLKDIS = 1,
CPU active
WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL =
0
C
ns
3P
ns
IDLE2 Mode; INTx event
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
TYP
D = 1/ External Clock Frequency (CLKIN).
C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 μs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator.
P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Assumes the internal LDO is used with a 0.1uF bandgap capacitor.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
2
CLKOUT
1
WAKEUP
INTx
A.
B.
C.
D.
INT[1:0] can only be used as a wake-up event for IDLE3 and IDLE2 modes.
RTC interrupt (internal signal) can be used as wake-up event for IDLE3 and IDLE2 modes.
Any unmasked interrupt can be used to exit the IDLE2 mode.
CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, SAR, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT
Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock.
Figure 5-13. Wake-Up From IDLE Timings
5.8.3
XF Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-10. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For XF (1)
(see Figure 5-14)
NO.
1
(1)
(2)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
PARAMETER
td(XF)
(2)
Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF high
MIN
MAX
0
10.2
UNIT
ns
P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 μs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator.
(A)
CLKOUT
1
XF
A.
CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, SAR, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT
Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock.
Figure 5-14. XF Timings
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
85
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.9
www.ti.com
External Memory Interface (EMIF)
The device supports several memories and external device interfaces, including: NOR Flash, NAND
Flash, SRAM, Non-Mobile SDRAM, and Mobile SDRAM (mSDRAM).
Note: The device can support non-mobile SDRAM under certain circumstances. The device also always
uses mobile SDRAM initialization, but it is able to support SDRAM memories that ignore the BA0 and BA1
pins for the 'load mode register' command. During the mobile SDRAM initialization, the device issues the
'load mode register' initialization command to two different addresses that differ in only the BA0 and BA1
address bits. These registers are the Extended Mode register and the Mode register. The Extended mode
register exists only in mSDRAM and not in non-mSDRAM. If a non-mobile SDRAM memory ignores bits
BA0 and BA1, the second loaded register value overwrites the first, leaving the desired value in the Mode
register and the non-mobile SDRAM will work with the device.
The EMIF provides an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus, an address bus width up to 21 bits, and 6 chip selects,
along with memory control signals.
The EM_A[20:15] address signals are multiplexed with the GPIO peripheral and controlled by the External
Bus Selection Register (EBSR). For more detail on the pin muxing, see the Section 3.6.1, External Bus
Selection Register (EBSR).
5.9.1
EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support
The EMIF supports asynchronous:
• SRAM memories
• NAND Flash memories
• NOR Flash memories
The EMIF data bus can be configured for both 8- or 16-bit width. The device supports up to 21 address
lines and four external wait/interrupt inputs. Up to four asynchronous chip selects are supported by EMIF
(EM_CS[5:2]).
Each chip select has the following individually programmable attributes:
• Data bus width
• Read cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe
• Write cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe
• Bus turn around time
• Extended Wait Option With Programmable Timeout
• Select Strobe Option
• NAND flash controller supports 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation on blocks of 512 bytes
5.9.2
EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported
The EMIF supports 16-bit non-mobile and mobile single data rate (SDR) SDRAM in addition to the
asynchronous memories listed in Section 5.9.1, EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support. The supported
SDRAM and mobile SDRAM configurations are:
• One, two, and four bank SDRAM/mSDRAM devices
• Supports devices with eight, nine, ten, and eleven column addresses
• CAS latency of two or three clock cycles
• 16-bit data-bus width
• 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 -V LVCMOS interface that is separate from the rest of the chip I/Os.
• One (EM_CS0) or two (EM_CS[1:0]) chip selects
• 256-, 512-, 1024-, and 2048- word page sizes
• Burst lengths of 4 or 8
• Sequential burst type. Interleave burst type not supported.
86
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Auto initialization from reset
Partial Array Self Refresh and Temperature Controlled Self Refresh modes
Temperature Controlled Self Refresh is only supported for mobile SDRAM having on-chip temperature
sensor
Prioritized refresh
Programmable refresh rate and backlog counter
Programmable timing parameters
Auto Precharge not supported for better Bank Interleaving performance
Additionally, the SDRAM/mSDRAM interface of EMIF supports placing the SDRAM/mSDRAM in "SelfRefresh" and "Powerdown Modes". Self-Refresh mode allows the SDRAM/mSDRAM to be put into a lowpower state while still retaining memory contents; since the SDRAM/mSDRAM will continue to refresh
itself even without clocks from the DSP. Powerdown mode achieves even lower power, except the DSP
must periodically wake the SDRAM/mSDRAM up and issue refreshes if data retention is required. To
achieve the lowest power consumption, the SDRAM/mSDRAM interface has configurable slew rate on the
EMIF pins.
The device has limitations to the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin based on the CVDD and
DVDDEMIF.
• The clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin can be configured either as SYSCLK (DSP Operating
Frequency) or SYSCLK/2 via bit 0 of the ECDR Register (0x1C26h)
• When CVDD = 1.3 V or 1.4 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the
EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz (EM_SDCLK ≤ 100 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK ≤ 100 MHz, the
EM_SDCLK can be configured either as SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2, but if SYSCLK > 100 MHz, the
EM_SDCLK must be configured as SYSCLK/2.
• When CVDD =1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the
EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 60 MHz (EM_SDCLK ≤ 60 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK ≤ 60 MHz, the
EM_SDCLK can be configured as either SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2, but if SYSCLK > 60 MHz, the
EM_SDCLK must be configured as SYSCLK/2.
• When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, regardless of the CVDD voltage, the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin
must be configured as SYSCLK/2 and ≤ 50 MHz.
5.9.3
EMIF Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-11 shows the EMIF registers.
Table 5-11. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers (1)
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
1000h
REV
(1)
REGISTER NAME
Revision Register
1001h
STATUS
Status Register
1004h
AWCCR1
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 1
1005h
AWCCR2
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 2
1008h
SDCR1
SDRAM/mSDRAM Configuration Register 1
1009h
SDCR2
SDRAM/mSDRAM Configuration Register 2
100Ch
SDRCR
SDRAM/mSDRAM Refresh Control Register
1010h
ACS2CR1
Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 1
1011h
ACS2CR2
Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 2
1014h
ACS3CR1
Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 1
1015h
ACS3CR2
Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 2
1018h
ACS4CR1
Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 1
Before reading or writing to the EMIF registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to 00b in the EMIF system control register to enable
word accesses to the EMIF registers.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
87
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-11. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers(1) (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
88
REGISTER NAME
1019h
ACS4CR2
Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 2
101Ch
ACS5CR1
Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 1
101Dh
ACS5CR2
Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 2
1020h
SDTIMR1
SDRAM/mSDRAM Timing Register 1
1021h
SDTIMR2
SDRAM/mSDRAM Timing Register 2
103Ch
SDSRETR
SDRAM/mSDRAM Self Refresh Exit Timing Register
1040h
EIRR
EMIF Interrupt Raw Register
1044h
EIMR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Register
1048h
EIMSR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Set Register
104Ch
EIMCR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Clear Register
1060h
NANDFCR
NAND Flash Control Register
1064h
NANDFSR1
NAND Flash Status Register 1
1065h
NANDFSR2
NAND Flash Status Register 2
1068h
PGMODECTRL1
Page Mode Control Register 1
1069h
PGMODECTRL2
Page Mode Control Register 2
1070h
NCS2ECC1
NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 1
1071h
NCS2ECC2
NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 2
1074h
NCS3ECC1
NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 1
1075h
NCS3ECC2
NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 2
1078h
NCS4ECC1
NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 1
1079h
NCS4ECC2
NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 2
107Ch
NCS5ECC1
NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 1
107Dh
NCS5ECC2
NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 2
10BCh
NAND4BITECCLOAD
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Load Register
10C0h
NAND4BITECC1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 1
10C1h
NAND4BITECC2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 2
10C4h
NAND4BITECC3
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 3
10C5h
NAND4BITECC4
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 4
10C8h
NAND4BITECC5
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 5
10C9h
NAND4BITECC6
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 6
10CCh
NAND4BITECC7
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 7
10CDh
NAND4BITECC8
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 8
10D0h
NANDERRADD1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 1
10D1h
NANDERRADD2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 2
10D4h
NANDERRADD3
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 3
10D5h
NANDERRADD4
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 4
10D8h
NANDERRVAL1
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 1
10D9h
NANDERRVAL2
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 2
10DCh
NANDERRVAL3
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 3
10DDh
NANDERRVAL4
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 4
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.9.4
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
EMIF Electrical Data/Timing CVDD = 1.05 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V, External
Loading = 10 pF
Table 5-12. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (see Figure 5-15 and Figure 516)
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF =
3.3/2.75/2.5 V
NO.
MIN
MAX
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V
MIN
UNIT
MAX
19
tsu(DV-CLKH)
Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before
EM_SDCLK rising
3.4
3.4
ns
20
th(CLKH-DIV)
Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK
rising
1.2
1.2
ns
(1)
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
Table 5-13. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF
SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (2) (see Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16)
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V
PARAMETER
MIN
1
NOM
MAX
16.67 (3)
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
20 (4)
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK
2
tw(CLK)
Pulse width, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high or
low
3
td(CLKH-CSV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EMA_CS[1:0] valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
5
td(CLKH-DQMV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EM_DQM[1:0] valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
7
td(CLKH-AV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0]
and EM_BA[1:0] valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
9
td(CLKH-DV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0]
valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
11
td(CLKH-RASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS
valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
13
td(CLKH-CASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS
valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
15
td(CLKH-WEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE
valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
21
td(CLKH-CKEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE
valid
1.1
13.2
1.1
13.2
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
8.34
ns
10
ns
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 60 or 100 MHz, E = 16.67 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the
EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.9.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported.
When CVDD = 1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 60 MHz
(EM_SDCLK = 60 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide
(literature number SPRUGU6).
When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more
information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6).
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
89
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-14. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) (see Figure 5-17, Figure 5-19, and
Figure 5-20)
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
NO.
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
READS and WRITES
2
tw(EM_WAIT)
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion
2E
ns
14.5
ns
0
ns
(3)
4E + 13
ns
tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase (3)
4E + 13
ns
READS
12
tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high
13
th(EMOEH-EMDIV)
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high
14
tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT)
Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase
WRITES
28
(1)
(2)
(3)
90
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively.
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended
wait states. Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-15. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2)
Figure 5-20) (4)
NO.
(3)
(see Figure 5-18 and
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
NOM
MAX
READS and WRITES
1
td(TURNAROUND)
Turn around time
(TA)*E - 13
(TA)*E
(TA)*E + 13
ns
READS
3
tc(EMRCYCLE)
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 13
(RS+RST+RH)*E
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 13
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 13
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E +139
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)
(RS)*E-13
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+13
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)
-13
0
+13
ns
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(RH)*E - 13
(RH)*E
(RH)*E + 13
ns
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-13
0
+13
ns
4
tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL)
5
th(EMOEH-EMCEH)
6
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS)*E-13
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+13
ns
7
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(RH)*E-13
(RH)*E
(RH)*E+13
ns
8
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS)*E-13
(RS)*E
(RS)*E+13
ns
9
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid
(RH)*E-13
(RH)*E
(RH)*E+13
ns
EM_OE active low width (EW = 0)
(RST)*E-13
(RST)*E
(RST)*E+13
ns
EM_OE active low width (EW = 1)
(RST+(EWC*16))*E-13
(RST+(EWC*16))*E
(RST+(EWC*16))*E+13
ns
4E-13
4E
4E+13
ns
(WS+WST+WH)*E-13
(WS+WST+WH)*E
(WS+WST+WH)*E+13
ns
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 13
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E +
13
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)
(WS)*E - 13
(WS)*E
(WS)*E + 13
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)
-13
0
+13
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(WH)*E-13
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+13
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-13
0
+13
ns
10
tw(EMOEL)
11
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high
WRITES
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)
15
tc(EMWCYCLE)
16
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)
17
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)
18
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E-13
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+13
ns
19
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(WH)*E-13
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+13
ns
20
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E-13
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+13
ns
21
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid
(WH)*E-13
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+13
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively.
EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
91
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-15. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory(1)(2)
Figure 5-20)(4) (continued)
NO.
(see Figure 5-18 and
CVDD = 1.05 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
PARAMETER
MIN
92
(3)
NOM
UNIT
MAX
EM_WE active low width (EW = 0)
(WST)*E-13
(WST)*E
(WST)*E+13
ns
EM_WE active low width (EW = 1)
(WST+(EWC*16))*E-13
(WST+(EWC*16))*E
(WST+(EWC*16))*E+13
ns
3E-13
4E
4E+13
ns
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E-13
(WS)*E
(WS)*E+13
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid
(WH)*E-13
(WH)*E
(WH)*E+13
ns
22
tw(EMWEL)
23
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high
24
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)
25
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.9.5
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
EMIF Electrical Data/Timing CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V, External
Loading = 10 pF
Table 5-16. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (see Figure 5-15 and Figure 516)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
DVDDEMIF =
3.3/2.75/2.5 V
NO.
MIN
MAX
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V
MIN
UNIT
MAX
19
tsu(DV-CLKH)
Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before
EM_SDCLK rising
3.4
3.4
ns
20
th(CLKH-DIV)
Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK
rising
1.2
1.2
ns
(1)
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
Table 5-17. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF
SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (2) (see Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16)
NO.
CVDD = 1.3 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V
PARAMETER
MIN
1
NOM
MAX
10 (3)
CVDD = 1.3 V
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
20 (4)
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK
2
tw(CLK)
Pulse width, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high or
low
3
td(CLKH-CSV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EMA_CS[1:0] valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
5
td(CLKH-DQMV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EM_DQM[1:0] valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
7
td(CLKH-AV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0]
and EM_BA[1:0] valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
9
td(CLKH-DV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0]
valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
11
td(CLKH-RASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS
valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
13
td(CLKH-CASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS
valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
15
td(CLKH-WEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE
valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
21
td(CLKH-CKEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE
valid
1.1
7.77
1.1
7.77
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
5
ns
10
ns
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 60 or 100 MHz, E = 16.67 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the
EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.9.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported.
When CVDD = 1.3 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz
(EM_SDCLK = 100 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide
(literature number SPRUGU6).
When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more
information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6).
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
93
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-18. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF
SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (2) (see Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16)
NO.
PARAMETER
CVDD = 1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V
MIN
NOM
MAX
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK
2
tw(CLK)
Pulse width, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high or
low
3
td(CLKH-CSV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EMA_CS[1:0] valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
5
td(CLKH-DQMV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to
EM_DQM[1:0] valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
7
td(CLKH-AV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0]
and EM_BA[1:0] valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
9
td(CLKH-DV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0]
valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
11
td(CLKH-RASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS
valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
13
td(CLKH-CASV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS
valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
15
td(CLKH-WEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE
valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
21
td(CLKH-CKEV)
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE
valid
TBD
7.77
TBD
7.77
ns
(1)
(2)
94
E
CVDD = 1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V
2E
E/2
ns
E
ns
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For more detail on the EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.9.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous
DRAM Memory Supported.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) (see Figure 5-17, Figure 5-19, and
Figure 5-20)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
NO.
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
READS and WRITES
2
tw(EM_WAIT)
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion
2E
ns
11
ns
0
ns
(3)
4E + 7.5
ns
tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase (3)
4E + 7.5
ns
READS
12
tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high
13
th(EMOEH-EMDIV)
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high
14
tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT)
Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase
WRITES
28
(1)
(2)
(3)
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively.
Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended
wait states. Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
95
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2)
Figure 5-19, and Figure 5-20)
NO.
(3) (4)
(see Figure 5-17,
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
NOM
MAX
READS and WRITES
1
td(TURNAROUND)
Turn around time
(TA)*E - 7.5
(TA)*E
(TA)*E + 7.5
ns
READS
3
tc(EMRCYCLE)
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 7.5
(RS+RST+RH)*E
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 7.5
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)
(RS)*E - 7.5
(RS)*E
(RS)*E + 7.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)
-7.5
0
+7.5
ns
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(RH)*E - 7.5
(RH)*E
(RH)*E + 7.5
ns
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-7.5
0
+7.5
ns
4
tsu(EMCSL-EMOEL)
5
th(EMOEH-EMCSH)
6
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS)*E - 7.5
(RS)*E
(RS)*E + 7.5
ns
7
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(RH)*E - 7.5
(RH)*E
(RH)*E + 7.5
ns
8
tsu(EMAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS)*E - 7.5
(RS)*E
(RS)*E + 7.5
ns
9
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid
(RH)*E - 7.5
(RH)*E
(RH)*E + 7.5
ns
EM_OE active low width (EW = 0)
(RST)*E - 7.5
(RST)*E
(RST)*E + 7.5
ns
EM_OE active low width (EW = 1)
(RST+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5
(RST+(EWC*16))*E
(RST+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5
ns
4E - 7.5
4E
4E + 7.5
ns
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)
(WS+WST+WH)*E - 7.5
(WS+WST+WH)*E
(WS+WST+WH)*E + 7.5
ns
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E 7.5
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E +
7.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)
(WS)*E - 7.5
(WS)*E
(WS)*E +7. 5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)
-7.5
0
+7.5
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)
(WH)*E - 7.5
(WH)*E
(WH)*E + 7.5
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)
-7.5
0
+7.5
ns
10
tw(EMOEL)
11
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high
WRITES
15
tc(EMWCYCLE)
16
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)
17
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)
18
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E - 7.5
(WS)*E
(WS)*E + 7.5
ns
19
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(WH)*E - 7.5
(WH)*E
(WH)*E + 7.5
ns
20
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E - 7.5
(WS)*E
(WS)*E + 7.5
ns
21
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid
(WH)*E - 7.5
(WH)*E
(WH)*E + 7.5
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
96
Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.
TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.
E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively.
EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory(1)(2)
Figure 5-19, and Figure 5-20) (continued)
NO.
(3) (4)
(see Figure 5-17,
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V
PARAMETER
MIN
NOM
UNIT
MAX
EM_WE active low width (EW = 0)
(WST)*E - 7.5
(WST)*E
(WST)*E + 7.5
ns
EM_WE active low width (EW = 1)
(WST+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5
(WST+(EWC*16))*E
(WST+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5
ns
3E - 7.5
4E
4E + 7.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS)*E - 7.5
(WS)*E
(WS)*E + 7.5
ns
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid
(WH)*E - 7.5
(WH)*E
(WH)*E + 7.5
ns
22
tw(EMWEL)
23
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high
24
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)
25
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)
BASIC mSDRAM
WRITE OPERATION
1
2
2
EM_SDCLK
3
3
EM_CS[1:0]
5
5
EM_DQM[1:0]
7
7
7
7
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
9
9
EM_D[15:0]
11
11
EM_SDRAS
13
EM_SDCAS
15
15
EM_WE
Figure 5-15. EMIF Basic SDRAM/mSDRAM Write Operation
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
97
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
BASIC mSDRAM
READ OPERATION
www.ti.com
1
2
2
EM_SDCLK
3
3
EM_CS[1:0]
5
5
EM_DQM[1:0]
7
7
7
7
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
19
17
2 EM_CLK Delay
20
17
EM_D[15:0]
11
11
EM_SDRAS
13
13
EM_SDCAS
EM_WE
Figure 5-16. EMIF Basic SDRAM/mSDRAM Read Operation
3
1
EM_CS[5:2]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
4
8
5
9
6
7
10
EM_OE
13
12
EM_D[15:0]
EM_WE
Figure 5-17. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF
98
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
15
1
EM_CS[5:2]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
EM_WE
25
24
EM_D[15:0]
EM_OE
Figure 5-18. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF
EM_CS[5:2]
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAITx
STROBE HOLD
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
EM_D[15:0]
14
11
EM_OE
2
EM_WAITx
Asserted
2
Deasserted
Figure 5-19. EM_WAITx Read Timing Requirements
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
99
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
EM_CS[5:2]
SETUP
www.ti.com
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAITx
STROBE HOLD
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[20:0]
EM_D[15:0]
28
25
EM_WE
2
EM_WAITx
Asserted
2
Deasserted
Figure 5-20. EM_WAITx Write Timing Requirements
100
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.10 Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)
The device includes two MMC/SD controllers which are compliant with MMC V3.31, Secure Digital Part 1
Physical Layer Specification V2.0, and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V3.3 specifications. The
MMC/SD card controller supports these industry standards and assumes the reader is familiar with these
standards.
Each MMC/SD Controller in the device has the following features:
• Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) protocol support
• Programmable clock frequency
• 512 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead
• Slave DMA transfer capability
The MMC/SD card controller transfers data between the CPU and DMA controller on one side and
MMC/SD card on the other side. The CPU and DMA controller can read/write the data in the card by
accessing the registers in the MMC/SD controller.
The MMC/SD controller on this device, does not support the SPI mode of operation.
5.10.1
MMC/SD Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-21 and Table 5-22 show the MMC/SD registers. The MMC/SD0 registers start at address 0x3A00
and the MMC/SD1 registers start at address 0x3B00.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
101
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-21. MMC/SD0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
3A00h
MMCCTL
MMC Control Register
3A04h
MMCCLK
MMC Memory Clock Control Register
3A08h
MMCST0
MMC Status Register 0
3A0Ch
MMCST1
MMC Status Register 1
3A10h
MMCIM
3A14h
MMCTOR
MMC Response Time-Out Register
3A18h
MMCTOD
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register
3A1Ch
MMCBLEN
MMC Block Length Register
3A20h
MMCNBLK
MMC Number of Blocks Register
3A24h
MMCNBLC
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register
3A28h
MMCDRR1
MMC Data Receive 1 Register
3A29h
MMCDRR2
MMC Data Receive 2 Register
3A2Ch
MMCDXR1
MMC Data Transmit 1 Register
3A2Dh
MMCDXR2
MMC Data Transmit 2 Register
3A30h
MMCCMD
MMC Command Register
3A34h
MMCARGHL
MMC Argument Register
3A38h
MMCRSP0
MMC Response Register 0
3A39h
MMCRSP1
MMC Response Register 1
3A3Ch
MMCRSP2
MMC Response Register 2
3A3Dh
MMCRSP3
MMC Response Register 3
3A40h
MMCRSP4
MMC Response Register 4
3A41h
MMCRSP5
MMC Response Register 5
3A44h
MMCRSP6
MMC Response Register 6
3A45h
MMCRSP7
MMC Response Register 7
3A48h
MMCDRSP
MMC Data Response Register
MMC Command Index Register
3A50h
MMCCIDX
3A64h – 3A70h
–
3A74h
MMCFIFOCTL
102
REGISTER NAME
MMC Interrupt Mask Register
Reserved
MMC FIFO Control Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-22. MMC/SD1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
3B00h
MMCCTL
MMC Control Register
3B04h
MMCCLK
MMC Memory Clock Control Register
3B08h
MMCST0
MMC Status Register 0
3B0Ch
MMCST1
MMC Status Register 1
3B10h
MMCIM
3B14h
MMCTOR
MMC Response Time-Out Register
3B18h
MMCTOD
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register
3B1Ch
MMCBLEN
MMC Block Length Register
3B20h
MMCNBLK
MMC Number of Blocks Register
3B24h
MMCNBLC
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register
3B28h
MMCDRR1
MMC Data Receive 1 Register
3B29h
MMCDRR2
MMC Data Receive 2 Register
3B2Ch
MMCDXR1
MMC Data Transmit 1 Register
3B2Dh
MMCDXR2
MMC Data Transmit 2 Register
3B30h
MMCCMD
MMC Command Register
3B34h
MMCARGHL
MMC Argument Register
3B38h
MMCRSP0
MMC Response Register 0
3B39h
MMCRSP1
MMC Response Register 1
3B3Ch
MMCRSP2
MMC Response Register 2
3B3Dh
MMCRSP3
MMC Response Register 3
3B40h
MMCRSP4
MMC Response Register 4
3B41h
MMCRSP5
MMC Response Register 5
3B44h
MMCRSP6
MMC Response Register 6
3B45h
MMCRSP7
MMC Response Register 7
3B48h
MMCDRSP
MMC Data Response Register
3B50h
MMCCIDX
MMC Command Index Register
3B74h
MMCFIFOCTL
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MMC Interrupt Mask Register
MMC FIFO Control Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
103
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.10.2 MMC/SD Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-23. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD (see Figure 5-21 and Figure 5-24)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
CVDD = 1.05 V
FAST MODE
STD MODE
NO
.
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(CMDV-CLKH)
Setup time, MMCx_CMD data input valid before MMCx_CLK high
3
3
ns
2
th(CLKH-CMDV)
Hold time, MMCx_CMD data input valid after MMCx_CLK high
3
3
ns
3
tsu(DATV-CLKH)
Setup time, MMC_Dx data input valid before MMCx_CLK high
3
3
ns
4
th(CLKH-DATV)
Hold time, MMC_Dx data input valid after MMCx_CLK high
3
3
ns
Table 5-24. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC Output (1) (see
Figure 5-21 and Figure 5-24)
NO
.
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
CVDD = 1.05 V
FAST MODE
STD MODE
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
7
f(CLK)
Operating frequency, MMCx_CLK
0
50 (2)
0
25 (2)
MHz
8
f(CLK_ID)
Identification mode frequency, MMCx_CLK
0
400
0
400
kHz
9
tw(CLKL)
Pulse width, MMCx_CLK low
7
10
10
tw(CLKH)
Pulse width, MMCx_CLK high
7
10
11
tr(CLK)
Rise time, MMCx_CLK
12
tf(CLK)
Fall time, MMCx_CLK
13
td(MDCLKL-CMDIV)
Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output invalid
14
td(MDCLKL-CMDV)
Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output valid
15
td(MDCLKL-DATIV)
Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output invalid
td(MDCLKL-DATV)
Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output valid
16
(1)
(2)
ns
ns
3
3
-4
3
ns
3
ns
-4.1
ns
4
5.1
-4
-4.1
ns
ns
4
5.1
ns
For MMC/SD, the parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V and 2.75 V.
Use this value or SYS_CLK/2 whichever is smaller.
7
9
10
MMCx_CLK
13
14
VALID
MMCx_CMD
Figure 5-21. MMC/SD Host Command Write Timing
9
10
7
MMCx_CLK
4
4
3
MMCx_Dx
Start
3
D0
D1
Dx
End
Figure 5-22. MMC/SD Card Response Timing
104
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
9
7
10
MMCx_CLK
1
2
MMCx_CMD
START
XMIT
Valid
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 5-23. MMC/SD Host Write Timing
7
9
10
MMCx_CLK
15
16
VALID
MMCx_DAT
Figure 5-24. MMC/SD Data Write Timing
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
105
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.11 Real-Time Clock (RTC)
The device includes a Real-Time Clock (RTC) with its own separated power supply and isolation circuits.
The separate supply and isolation circuits allow the RTC to run with the least possible power consumption,
called RTC only mode. The RTC only mode requires CVDDRTC, LDOI, and DVDDRTC power domains to be
powered, but other power domains can be shut off. See Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode for details. All
RTC registers are preserved (except for RTC Control and RTC Update Registers) and the counter
continues to operate when the device is powered off. The RTC also has the capability to wakeup the
device from idle states via alarms, periodic interrupts, or an external WAKEUP input. Additionally, the RTC
is able to output an alarm or periodic interrupt on the WAKEUP pin to cause external power management
to re-enable power to the DSP Core and I/O. Note: The RTC Core (CVDDRTC) must be powered by an
external power source even though RTC is not used. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC.
The device RTC provides the following features:
• 100-year calendar up to year 2099.
• Counts seconds, minutes, hours, day of the week, date, month, and year with leap year compensation
• Millisecond time correction
• Binary-coded-decimal (BCD) representation of time, calendar, and alarm
• 24-hour clock mode
• Second, minute, hour, day, or week alarm interrupt
• Periodic interrupt: every millisecond, second, minute, hour, or day
• Alarm interrupt: precise time of day
• Single interrupt to the DSP CPU
• 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator with frequency calibration
Control of the RTC is maintained through a set of I/O memory mapped registers (see Table 5-26). Note
that any write to these registers will be synchronized to the RTC 32.768-KHz clock; thus, the CPU must
run at least 3X faster than the RTC. Writes to these registers will not be evident until the next two 32.768KHz clock cycles later. Furthermore, if the RTC Oscillator is disabled, no RTC register can be written to.
The RTC has its own power-on-reset (POR) circuit which resets the registers in the RTC core domain
when power is first applied to the CVDDRTC power pin. The RTC flops are not reset by the device's RESET
pin.
The scratch registers in the RTC can be used to take advantage of this unique reset domain to keep track
of when the DSP boots and whether the RTC time registers have already been initialized to the current
clock time or whether the software needs to go into a routine to prompt the user to set the time/date.
5.11.1 RTC Only Mode
The maximum power saving can be achieved by using the RTC only mode. There are hardware and
software requirements to use the RTC only mode.
Hardware Requirements:
• The DSP_LDO_EN pin must be tied to GND or pulled down to GND. (Note: the device does not
support the DSP_LDO. It is only enabled in order to use the RTC only mode, not to use the DSP_LDO)
• The RTC Core (CVDDRTC), RTC I/O (DVDDRTC), and LDO inputs (LDOI) must always be powered.
• VDDA_ANA is recommended to be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. If VDDA_ANA is powered
externally, then it must always be powered.
• All other power domains can be totally shut down during the RTC only mode.
• A high pulse for a minimum of one RTC clock period (30.5 µs) to the WAKEUP pin is required to wake
up the device from the RTC only mode.
106
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Power Down Sequence:
1. CPU must set the LDO_PD bit or the BG_PD bit in the RTCPMGT register (See Figure 5-25). Once
the LDO_PD bit or the BG_PD bit is set to 1, the DSP_LDOO will be internally shut off and it will cause
the internal POR holds the internal POWERGOOD signal low, which creates isolation for RTC.
2. All of the device power domains can be shut down except RTC Core (CVDDRTC), RTC I/O
(DVDDRTC), and LDO inputs (LDOI).
Wake-Up Sequence:
1. When waking up the device, all power domains must be turned back on before or upon applying a
pulse to WAKEUP.
2. A pulse (≥ 30.5 µs) must be applied to the WAKEUP pin (active high). When the WAKEUP pin is
asserted, the voltage on the DSP_LDOO pin will start ramping up at the positive level of WAKEUP and
it is monitored by the internal POR. Until the voltage reaches to the threshold level, the internal POR
will hold the internal POWERGOOD signal low, which provides isolation to RTC during transition
period. Once the voltage reaches to the threshold level, the internal POR asserts the internal
POWERGOOD signal (logic level high) and it resets reset of the system and disables RTC isolation
and enables CPU to communicate with RTC.
Figure 5-25. RTC Power Management Register (RTCPMGT) [1930h]
15
8
Reserved
R-0
7
5
4
Reserved
WU_DOUT
R-0
R/W-1
3
2
WU_DIR
BG_PD
R/W-0
R/W-0
1
LDO_PD
R/W-0
0
RTCCLKOUTEN
R/W-0
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset
Table 5-25. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
15:5
RESERVED
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
4
WU_DOUT
Wakeup output, active low/open-drain.
0 = WAKEUP pin driven low.
1 = WAKEUP pin is in high-impedance (Hi-Z).
3
2
WU_DIR
BG_PD
DESCRIPTION
Wakeup pin direction control.
0 = WAKEUP pin configured as a input.
1 = WAKEUP pin configured as a output.
Note: When the WAKEUP pin is configured as an input, it is active high. When the WAKEUP pin is
configured as an output, is an open-drain that is active low and should be externally pulled-up via a
10-kΩ resistor to DVDDRTC. WU_DIR must be configured as an input to allow the WAKEUP pin to
wake the device up from idle modes.
Bandgap, on-chip LDOs, and the analog POR power down bit.
This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO), the Analog POR,
and Bandgap reference. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal
LDOs supply power to the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD
and LDO_PD power down mechanisms should not be used since POR gets powered down and the
POWERGOOD signal is not generated properly.
After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and the Bandgap reference can be reenabled by the WAKEUP pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. The Bandgap circuit will take about
100 msec to charge the external 0.1 uF capacitor via the internal 326-kΩ resistor.
0 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are enabled.
1 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are disabled (shutdown).
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
107
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-25. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions (continued)
BIT
1
NAME
LDO_PD
DESCRIPTION
On-chip LDOs and Analog POR power down bit.
This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO) and the Analog
POR. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal LDOs supply power to
the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD and LDO_PD power
down mechanisms should not be used since POR gets powered down and the POWERGOOD
signal is not generated properly.
After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs and Analog POR can be re-enabled by the WAKEUP
pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. This bit keeps the Bandgap reference turned on to allow a
faster wake-up time with the expense power consumption of the Bandgap reference.
0 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are enabled.
1 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are disabled (shutdown).
0
108
RTCCLKOUTEN
Clockout output enable bit.
0 = Clock output disabled.
1 = Clock output enabled.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.11.2 RTC Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-26 shows the RTC registers.
Table 5-26. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
1900h
RTCINTEN
1901h
RTCUPDATE
RTC Update Register
1904h
RTCMIL
Milliseconds Register
1905h
RTCMILA
Milliseconds Alarm Register
1908h
RTCSEC
Seconds Register
1909h
RTCSECA
190Ch
RTCMIN
190Dh
RTCMINA
Minutes Alarm Register
1910h
RTCHOUR
Hours Register
1911h
RTCHOURA
1914h
RTCDAY
1915h
RTCDAYA
1918h
RTCMONTH
1919h
RTCMONTHA
REGISTER NAME
RTC Interrupt Enable Register
Seconds Alarm Register
Minutes Register
Hours Alarm Register
Days Register
Days Alarm Register
Months Register
Months Alarm Register
191Ch
RTCYEAR
191Dh
RTCYEARA
1920h
RTCINTFL
1921h
RTCNOPWR
RTC Lost Power Status Register
1924h
RTCINTREG
RTC Interrupt Register
1928h
RTCDRIFT
192Ch
RTCOSC
1930h
RTCPMGT
RTC Power Management Register
1960h
RTCSCR1
RTC LSW Scratch Register 1
1961h
RTCSCR2
RTC MSW Scratch Register 2
1964h
RTCSCR3
RTC LSW Scratch Register 3
1965h
RTCSCR4
RTC MSW Scratch Register 4
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Years Register
Years Alarm Register
RTC Interrupt Flag Register
RTC Compensation Register
RTC Oscillator Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
109
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.12 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between the device and other devices
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive 2 to 8-bit data to/from the DSP through
the I2C module. The I2C port does not support CBUS compatible devices.
The I2C port supports the following features:
• Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
• Data Transfer Rate from 10 kbps to 400 kbps (Philips Fast-Mode Rate)
• Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or Less
• Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
• Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
• One Read DMA Event and One Write DMA Event, which can be used by the DMA Controller
• One Interrupt that can be used by the CPU
• Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
The I2C module clock must be in the range from 6.7 MHz to 13.3 MHz. This is necessary for proper
operation of the I2C module. With the I2C module clock in this range, the noise filters on the SDA and
SCL pins suppress noise that has a duration of 50 ns or shorter. The I2C module clock is derived from the
DSP clock divided by a programmable prescaler.
110
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
5.12.1
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
I2C Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-27 shows the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) registers.
Table 5-27. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
1A00h
ICOAR
I2C Own Address Register
1A04h
ICIMR
I2C Interrupt Mask Register
1A08h
ICSTR
I2C Interrupt Status Register
1A0Ch
ICCLKL
I2C Clock Low-Time Divider Register
1A10h
ICCLKH
I2C Clock High-Time Divider Register
1A14h
ICCNT
I2C Data Count Register
1A18h
ICDRR
I2C Data Receive Register
1A1Ch
ICSAR
I2C Slave Address Register
1A20h
ICDXR
I2C Data Transmit Register
1A24h
ICMDR
I2C Mode Register
1A28h
ICIVR
I2C Interrupt Vector Register
1A2Ch
ICEMDR
I2C Extended Mode Register
1A30h
ICPSC
I2C Prescaler Register
1A34h
ICPID1
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 1
1A38h
ICPID2
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 2
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
111
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.12.2
www.ti.com
I2C Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-28. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-26)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
STANDARD
MODE
MIN
UNIT
FAST MODE
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a
repeated START condition)
4
0.6
µs
4
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
5
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
6
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
100 (2)
(3)
(3)
7
th(SDA-SCLL)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low
0
8
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA (5)
1000 20 + 0.1Cb (6)
300
ns
10
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
(5)
(6)
300
ns
11
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA (5)
300 20 + 0.1Cb (6)
300
ns
12
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL (5)
300 20 + 0.1Cb (6)
300
ns
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
15
Cb (6)
Capacitive load for each bus line
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0
ns
0.9
(4)
1.3
1000 20 + 0.1Cb
4
µs
µs
0.6
µs
0
400
50
ns
400
pF
The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down. Also these pins are not 3.6 V-tolerant (their VIH cannot go above DVDDIO + 0.3 V).
A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
The rise/fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load (Cb) and
external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup resistor.
The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified.
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
11
9
SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
SCL
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-26. I2C Receive Timings
112
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-29. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-27)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
PARAMETER
STANDARD
MODE
MIN
16
(1)
(2)
UNIT
FAST MODE
MAX
MIN
MAX
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
17
td(SCLH-SDAL)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
18
td(SDAL-SCLL)
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a
repeated START condition)
4
0.6
µs
19
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
20
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
21
td(SDAV-SCLH)
Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
250
100
22
tv(SCLL-SDAV)
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low
0
0
23
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
1.3
24
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA (2)
1000 20 + 0.1Cb (1)
300
ns
25
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
(2)
1000 20 + 0.1Cb (1)
300
ns
26
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA (2)
300 20 + 0.1Cb (1)
300
ns
27
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
(2)
(1)
28
td(SCLH-SDAH)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
29
Cp
Capacitance for each I2C pin
300 20 + 0.1Cb
4
ns
0.9
µs
300
0.6
10
µs
ns
µs
10
pF
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
The rise/fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load (Cb) and
external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup resistor.
The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified.
26
24
SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
SCL
16
27
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-27. I2C Transmit Timings
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
113
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.13 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data received from an external peripheral device and
parallel-to-serial conversions on data transmitted to an external peripheral device via a serial bus.
The device has one UART peripheral with the following features:
• Programmable baud rates (frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65535)
• Fully programmable serial interface characteristics:
– 5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters
– Even, odd, or no PARITY bit generation and detection
– 1, 1.5, or 2 STOP bit generation
• 16-byte depth transmitter and receiver FIFOs:
– The UART can be operated with or without the FIFOs
– 1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA
• DMA signaling capability for both received and transmitted data
• CPU interrupt capability for both received and transmitted data
• False START bit detection
• Line break generation and detection
• Internal diagnostic capabilities:
– Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation
– Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation
• Programmable autoflow control using CTS and RTS signals
5.13.1 UART Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-30 shows the UART registers.
Table 5-30. UART Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
1B00h
RBR
Receiver Buffer Register (read only)
1B00h
THR
Transmitter Holding Register (write only)
1B02h
IER
Interrupt Enable Register
1B04h
IIR
Interrupt Identification Register (read only)
1B04h
FCR
FIFO Control Register (write only)
1B06h
LCR
Line Control Register
1B08h
MCR
Modem Control Register
114
REGISTER NAME
1B0Ah
LSR
Line Status Register
1B0Ch
MSR
Modem Status Register
1B0Eh
SCR
Scratch Register
1B10h
DLL
Divisor LSB Latch
1B12h
DLH
Divisor MSB Latch
1B18h
PWREMU_MGMT
Power and Emulation Management Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.13.2 UART Electrical Data/Timing [Receive/Transmit]
Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for UART Receive (1) (2) (see Figure 5-28)
CVDD = 1.05 V
NO.
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
4
tw(URXDB)
Pulse duration, receive data bit (UART_RXD) [15/30/100 pF]
U - 3.5
U+3
U - 3.5
U+3
ns
5
tw(URXSB)
Pulse duration, receive start bit [15/30/100 pF]
U - 3.5
U+3
U - 3.5
U+3
ns
(1)
(2)
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V
Table 5-32. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UART Transmit (1)
(see Figure 5-28)
NO.
(1)
(2)
CVDD = 1.05 V
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1
f(baud)
Maximum programmable bit rate
2
tw(UTXDB)
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (UART_TXD) [15/30/100 pF]
U - 3.5
U+4
3
tw(UTXSB)
Pulse duration, transmit start bit [15/30/100 pF]
U - 3.5
U+4
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MIN
3.75
MAX
(2)
UNIT
6.25
MHz
U - 3.5
U+4
ns
U - 3.5
U+4
ns
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V
3
2
UART_TXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
5
4
UART_RXD
Start
Bit
Data Bits
Figure 5-28. UART Transmit/Receive Timing
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
115
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.14 Inter-IC Sound (I2S)
The device I2S peripherals allow serial transfer of full-duplex streaming data, usually audio data, between
the device and an external I2S peripheral device such as an audio codec.
The device supports 4 independent dual-channel I2S peripherals, each with the following features:
• Full-duplex (transmit and receive) dual-channel communication
• Double buffered data registers that allow for continuous data streaming
• I2S/Left-justified and DSP data format with a data delay of 1 or 2 bits
• Data word-lengths of 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, or 32 bits
• Ability to sign-extend received data samples for easy use in signal processing algorithms
• Programmable polarity for both frame synchronization and bit clocks
• Stereo (in I2S/Left-justified or DSP data formats) or mono (in DSP data format) mode
• Detection of over-run, under-run, and frame-sync error conditions
5.14.1
I2S Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-33 through Table 5-36 show the I2S0 through I2S3 registers.
Table 5-33. I2S0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
2800h
I2S0SCTRL
I2S0 Serializer Control Register
2804h
I2S0SRATE
I2S0 Sample Rate Generator Register
2808h
I2S0TXLT0
I2S0 Transmit Left Data 0 Register
2809h
I2S0TXLT1
I2S0 Transmit Left Data 1 Register
280Ch
I2S0TXRT0
I2S0 Transmit Right Data 0 Register
280Dh
I2S0TXRT1
I2S0 Transmit Right Data 1 Register
2810h
I2S0INTFL
I2S0 Interrupt Flag Register
2814h
I2S0INTMASK
I2S0 Interrupt Mask Register
2828h
I2S0RXLT0
I2S0 Receive Left Data 0 Register
2829h
I2S0RXLT1
I2S0 Receive Left Data 1 Register
282Ch
I2S0RXRT0
I2S0 Receive Right Data 0 Register
282Dh
I2S0RXRT1
I2S0 Receive Right Data 1 Register
Table 5-34. I2S1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
116
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
2900h
I2S1SCTRL
I2S1 Serializer Control Register
2904h
I2S1SRATE
I2S1 Sample Rate Generator Register
2908h
I2S1TXLT0
I2S1 Transmit Left Data 0 Register
2909h
I2S1TXLT1
I2S1 Transmit Left Data 1 Register
290Ch
I2S1TXRT0
I2S1 Transmit Right Data 0 Register
290Dh
I2S1TXRT1
I2S1 Transmit Right Data 1 Register
2910h
I2S1INTFL
I2S1 Interrupt Flag Register
2914h
I2S1INTMASK
I2S1 Interrupt Mask Register
2928h
I2S1RXLT0
I2S1 Receive Left Data 0 Register
2929h
I2S1RXLT1
I2S1 Receive Left Data 1 Register
292Ch
I2S1RXRT0
I2S1 Receive Right Data 0 Register
292Dh
I2S1RXRT1
I2S1 Receive Right Data 1 Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-35. I2S2 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
2A00h
I2S2SCTRL
I2S2 Serializer Control Register
2A04h
I2S2SRATE
I2S2 Sample Rate Generator Register
2A08h
I2S2TXLT0
I2S2 Transmit Left Data 0 Register
2A09h
I2S2TXLT1
I2S2 Transmit Left Data 1 Register
2A0Ch
I2S2TXRT0
I2S2 Transmit Right Data 0 Register
2A0Dh
I2S2TXRT1
I2S2 Transmit Right Data 1 Register
2A10h
I2S2INTFL
I2S2 Interrupt Flag Register
2A14h
I2S2INTMASK
I2S2 Interrupt Mask Register
2A28h
I2S2RXLT0
I2S2 Receive Left Data 0 Register
2A29h
I2S2RXLT1
I2S2 Receive Left Data 1 Register
2A2Ch
I2S2RXRT0
I2S2 Receive Right Data 0 Register
2A2Dh
I2S2RXRT1
I2S2 Receive Right Data 1 Register
Table 5-36. I2S3 Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
2B00h
I2S3SCTRL
I2S3 Serializer Control Register
2B04h
I2S3SRATE
I2S3 Sample Rate Generator Register
2B08h
I2S3TXLT0
I2S3 Transmit Left Data 0 Register
2B09h
I2S3TXLT1
I2S3 Transmit Left Data 1 Register
2B0Ch
I2S3TXRT0
I2S3 Transmit Right Data 0 Register
2B0Dh
I2S3TXRT1
I2S3 Transmit Right Data 1 Register
2B10h
I2S3INTFL
I2S3 Interrupt Flag Register
2B14h
I2S3INTMASK
I2S3 Interrupt Mask Register
2B28h
I2S3RXLT0
I2S3 Receive Left Data 0 Register
2B29h
I2S3RXLT1
I2S3 Receive Left Data 1 Register
2B2Ch
I2S3RXRT0
I2S3 Receive Right Data 0 Register
2B2Dh
I2S3RXRT1
I2S3 Receive Right Data 1 Register
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
117
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.14.2 I2S Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-37. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V] (1) (see Figure 5-29)
MASTER
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
40 or
2P (1) (2)
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
(1) (2)
ns
2
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high
20
20
20
20
ns
3
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low
20
20
20
20
ns
tsu(RXV-CLKH)
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
5
5
5
5
ns
tsu(RXV-CLKL)
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
5
5
5
5
ns
th(CLKH-RXV)
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
3
3
3
3
ns
th(CLKL-RXV)
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
3
3
3
3
ns
tsu(FSV-CLKH)
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
–
–
15
15
ns
tsu(FSV-CLKL)
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
–
–
15
15
ns
th(CLKH-FSV)
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
–
–
tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3)
tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3)
ns
th(CLKL-FSV)
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
–
–
tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3)
tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3)
ns
10
40 or 2P
UNIT
Cycle time, I2S_CLK
9
40 or 2P
(1) (2)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
tc(CLK)
8
118
MIN
40 or
2P (1) (2)
CVDD = 1.05 V
1
7
(1)
(2)
(3)
MAX
SLAVE
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK).
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-38. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 1.8 V] (1) (see Figure 5-29)
MASTER
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
MAX
MIN
50 or 2P (1)
40 or 2P (1)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high
25
20
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low
25
tsu(RXV-CLKH)
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK
high (CLKPOL = 0)
tsu(RXV-CLKL)
MAX
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
20
ns
20
25
20
ns
5
5
5
5
ns
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK
low (CLKPOL = 1)
5
5
5
5
ns
th(CLKH-RXV)
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
3
3
3
3
ns
th(CLKL-RXV)
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
3
3
3
3
ns
tsu(FSV-CLKH)
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK
high (CLKPOL = 0)
–
–
15
15
ns
tsu(FSV-CLKL)
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK
low (CLKPOL = 1)
–
–
15
15
ns
th(CLKH-FSV)
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high
(CLKPOL = 0)
–
–
tw(CLKH) +
0.6 (3)
tw(CLKH) +
0.6 (3)
ns
th(CLKL-FSV)
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low
(CLKPOL = 1)
–
–
tw(CLKL) +
0.6 (3)
tw(CLKL) +
0.6 (3)
ns
2
tw(CLKH)
3
8
9
10
(2)
(2)
40 or 2P (1)
UNIT
MAX
25
Cycle time, I2S_CLK
(2)
MIN
ns
tc(CLK)
50 or 2P (1)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
(2)
1
7
(1)
(2)
(3)
SLAVE
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK).
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
119
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-39. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output
[I/O = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V] (see Figure 5-29)
MASTER
NO.
PARAMETER
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
1
2
3
4
5
(1)
(2)
120
MAX
SLAVE
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MIN
MAX
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
40 or
2P (1) (2)
40 or
2P (1) (2)
40 or
2P (1) (2)
40 or
2P (1) (2)
ns
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0)
20
20
20
20
ns
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1)
20
20
20
20
ns
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0)
20
20
20
20
ns
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1)
20
tdmax(CLKL-DXV)
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0)
0
15
0
14
0
15
0
15
ns
tdmax(CLKH-DXV)
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1)
0
15
0
14
0
15
0
15
ns
tdmax(CLKL-FSV)
Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0)
-1.1
14
-1.1
14
–
–
ns
tdmax(CLKH-FSV)
Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1)
-1.1
14
-1.1
14
–
–
ns
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, I2S_CLK
tw(CLKH)
tw(CLKL)
20
20
20
ns
P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-40. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output
[I/O = 1.8 V] (see Figure 5-29)
MASTER
NO.
PARAMETER
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
1
2
3
4
5
(1)
(2)
MAX
SLAVE
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MIN
MAX
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
50 or
2P (1) (2)
40 or
2P (1) (2)
50 or
2P (1) (2)
40 or
2P (1) (2)
ns
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0)
25
20
25
20
ns
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1)
25
20
25
20
ns
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0)
25
20
25
20
ns
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1)
25
tdmax(CLKL-DXV)
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0)
0
19
0
14
0
19
0
16.5
ns
tdmax(CLKH-DXV)
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1)
0
19
0
14
0
19
0
16.5
ns
tdmax(CLKL-FSV)
Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0)
-1.1
14
-1.1
14
–
–
ns
tdmax(CLKH-FSV)
Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1)
-1.1
14
-1.1
14
–
–
ns
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, I2S_CLK
tw(CLKH)
tw(CLKL)
20
25
20
ns
P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
121
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
1
3
2
I2S_CLK
(CLKPOL = 0)
I2S_CLK
(CLKPOL = 1)
5
I2S_FS
(Output, MODE = 1)
9
10
7
8
I2S_FS
(Input, MODE = 0)
4
I2S_DX
I2S_RX
Figure 5-29. I2S Input and Output Timings
122
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.15 Liquid Crystal Display Controller (LCDC)
The device includes a LCD Interface Display Driver (LIDD) controller.
The LIDD Controller supports the asynchronous LCD interface and has the following features:
• Provides full-timing programmability of control signals and output data
Note: Raster mode is not supported on this device.
The LCD controller is responsible for generating the correct external timing. The DMA engine provides a
constant flow of data from the frame buffers to the external LCD panel via the LIDD controller. In addition,
CPU access is provided to read and write registers.
5.15.1 LCDC Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-41 shows the LCDC peripheral registers.
Table 5-41. LCD Controller Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
2E00h
LCDREVMIN
LCD Minor Revision Register
2E01h
LCDREVMAJ
LCD Major Revision Register
2E04h
LCDCR
LCD Control Register
LCD Status Register
2E08h
LCDSR
2E0Ch
LCDLIDDCR
2E10h
LCDLIDDCS0CONFIG0
LCD LIDD CS0 Configuration Register 0
2E11h
LCDLIDDCS0CONFIG1
LCD LIDD CS0 Configuration Register 1
2E14h
LCDLIDDCS0ADDR
LCD LIDD CS0 Address Read/Write Register
2E18h
LCDLIDDCS0DATA
LCD LIDD CS0 Data Read/Write Register
2E1Ch
LCDLIDDCS1CONFIG0
LCD LIDD CS1 Configuration Register 0
2E1Dh
LCDLIDDCS1CONFIG1
LCD LIDD CS1 Configuration Register 1
2E20h
LCDLIDDCS1ADDR
LCD LIDD CS1 Address Read/Write Register
2E24h
LCDLIDDCS1DATA
LCD LIDD CS1 Data Read/Write Register
LCD LIDD Control Register
2E28h – 2E3Ah
—
2E40h
LCDDMACR
2E44h
LCDDMAFB0BAR0
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Base Address Register 0
2E45h
LCDDMAFB0BAR1
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Base Address Register 1
2E48h
LCDDMAFB0CAR0
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Ceiling Address Register 0
2E49h
LCDDMAFB0CAR1
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 0 Ceiling Address Register 1
2E4Ch
LCDDMAFB1BAR0
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Base Address Register 0
2E4Dh
LCDDMAFB1BAR1
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Base Address Register 1
2E50h
LCDDMAFB1CAR0
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Ceiling Address Register 0
2E51h
LCDDMAFB1CAR1
LCD DMA Frame Buffer 1 Ceiling Address Register 1
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved
LCD DMA Control Register
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
123
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.15.2 LCDC Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-42. Timing Requirements for LCD LIDD Mode (1) (see Figure 5-30 through Figure 5-37)
CVDD = 1.05 V
NO.
MIN
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
16
tsu(LCD_D-CLK)
Setup time, LCD_D[15:0] valid
before LCD_CLK rising edge
27
42
ns
17
th(CLK-LCD_D)
Hold time, LCD_D[15:0] valid after
LCD_CLK rising edge
0
0
ns
(1)
Over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
Table 5-43. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for LCD LIDD Mode (see
Figure 5-30 through Figure 5-37)
NO.
PARAMETER
4
td(LCD_D_V)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_D[15:0] valid (write)
5
td(LCD_D_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_D[15:0] invalid (write)
6
td(LCD_E_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_CSx_Ex low
7
td(LCD_E_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLKrising edge
to LCD_CSx_Ex high
8
td(LCD_A_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLKrising edge
to LCD_RS low
9
td(LCD_A_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_RS high
10
td(LCD_W_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_RW_WRB low
11
td(LCD_W_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_RW_WRB high
12
td(LCD_STRB_A)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_EN_RDB high
13
td(LCD_STRB_I)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_EN_RDB low
14
td(LCD_D_Z)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_D[15:0] in 3-state
15
td(Z_LCD_D)
Delay time, LCD_CLK rising edge
to LCD_D[15:0] valid from 3-state
124
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
MIN
5
-6
MAX
7
-6
5
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
ns
ns
7
-6
ns
ns
7
5
ns
ns
7
5
ns
ns
7
5
ns
ns
7
5
UNIT
ns
ns
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
W_SU
(0 to 31)
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
CS_DELAY
(0 to 3)
W_STROBE
(1 to 63)
R_SU
(0 to 31)
R_HOLD
(1 to 15)
W_HOLD
(1 to 15)
4
CS_DELAY
(0 to 3)
R_STROBE
(1 to 63)
5
14
17
16
LCD_D[15:0]
15
Write Data
Data[7:0]
Read Status
8
9
LCD_RS
RS
10
11
LCD_RW_WRB
R/W
12
12
13
13
E0
E1
LCD_CSx_Ex
Figure 5-30. Character Display HD44780 Write
W_HOLD
(1–15)
R_SU
(0–31)
R_STROBE
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1–63)
(1–5)
(0-3)
(0–31)
W_SU
17
15
4
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
(1–63)
(0 - 3)
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
14
16
LCD_D[7:0]
5
Data[7:0]
Write Instruction
Read
Data
8
9
RS
LCD_RS
10
11
LCD_RW_WRB
R/W
12
13
LCD_CSx_Ex
12
13
E0
E1
Figure 5-31. Character Display HD44780 Read
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
125
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_SU
(0-31)
W_STROBE
(1-63)
CS_DELAY
W_SU
(0-3)
(0-31)
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
(0-3)
(1-63)
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
4
LCD_D[15:0]
LCD_CSx_Ex
(async mode)
5
5
4
Write Address
Write Data
7
6
Data[15:0]
6
7
CS0
CS1
9
8
RS
LCD_RS
10
11
11
10
R/W
LCD_RW_WRB
12
13
12
13
EN
LCD_EN_RDB
Figure 5-32. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Write
126
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_SU
(0-31)
W_STROBE
R_SU
(0-31)
CS_DELAY
(1-63)
R_STROBE
(1-63
(0-3)
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1-15)
(0-3)
17
15
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
5
4
LCD_D[15:0]
14
16
Write Address
Data[15:0]
6
7
Read
Data
6
LCD_CSx_Ex
(Async Mode)
7
CS0
CS1
9
8
LCD_RS
RS
10
11
LCD_RW_WRB
R/W
12
13
12
LCD_EN_RDB
13
EN
Figure 5-33. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Read
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
127
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
R_SU
(0-31)
R_SU
(0-31)
R_STROBE R_HOLD CS_DELAY
(1-63)
(1-15)
(0-3)
16
17
15
R_STROBE R_HOLD CS_DELAY
(1-63)
(1-15)
(0-3)
17
15
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
14
16
14
LCD_D[15:0]
LCD_CSx_Ex
(Async Mode)
Data[15:0]
Read
Data
6
7
Read
Status
6
7
CS0
CS1
8
9
LCD_RS
RS
LCD_RW_WRB
R/W
12
13
12
13
EN
LCD_EN_RDB
Figure 5-34. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 6800 Status
128
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_SU
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
W_SU
(0-31)
(1-63)
(0-3)
(0-31)
W_STROBE
CS_DELAY
(1-63)
(0 - 3)
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
4
LCD_D[15:0]
LCD_CSx_Ex
(Async Mode)
5
4
Write Address
5
DATA[15:0]
Write Data
7
6
6
7
CS0
CS1
8
9
LCD_RS
RS
10
11
10
11
LCD_RW_WRB
WRB
LCD_EN_RDB
RDB
Figure 5-35. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Write
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
129
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
W_HOLD
(1-15)
W_SU
(0-31)
W_STROBE
R_SU
(0-31)
CS_DELAY
(1-63)
R_STROBE
(0-3)
R_HOLD
CS_DELAY
(1-63)
(1-15)
(0-3)
16
17
15
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
4
LCD_D[15:0]
5
14
Data[15:0]
Write Address
6
7
6
LCD_CSx_Ex
(async mode)
Read
Data
7
CS0
CS1
9
8
LCD_RS
RS
10
11
WRB
LCD_RW_WRB
12
13
RDB
LCD_EN_RDB
Figure 5-36. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Read
130
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
R_SU
(0-31)
R_SU
(0-31)
R_STROBE
(1-63)
R_HOLD
(1-15)
CS_DELAY
R_STROBE R_HOLD
(0-3)
(1-63)
(1-15)
16
17
CS_DELAY
(0-3)
LCD_CLK
[Internal]
14
16
17
15
14
15
Data[15:0]
LCD_D[15:0]
Read Data
Read Status
7
6
6
7
LCD_CSx_Ex
CS0
CS1
8
9
LCD_RS
RS
LCD_RW_WRB
WRB
12
13
12
13
RDB
LCD_PCLK
Figure 5-37. Micro-Interface Graphic Display 8080 Status
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
131
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.16 10-Bit SAR ADC
The device includes a 10-bit SAR ADC using a switched capacitor architecture which converts an analog
input signal to a digital value at a maximum rate of 62.5-k samples per second (ksps) for use by the DSP.
This SAR module supports six channels that are connected to four general purpose analog pins (GPAIN
[3:0]) which can be used as general purpose outputs.
The device SAR supports the following features:
• Up to 62.5 ksps (2-MHz clock with 32 cycles per conversion)
• Single conversion and continuous back-to-back conversion modes
• Interrupt driven or polling conversion or DMA event generation
• Internal configurable bandgap reference voltages of 1 V or 0.8 V; or external Vref of VDDA_ANA
• One 3.6-V Tolerant analog input (GPAIN0) with internal voltage division for conversion of battery
voltage
• Software controlled power down
• Individually configurable general-purpose digital outputs
5.16.1 SAR ADC Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-44 shows the SAR ADC peripheral registers.
Table 5-44. SAR Analog Control Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
7012h
SARCTRL
SAR A/D Control Register
7014h
SARDATA
SAR A/D Data Register
7016h
SARCLKCTRL
SAR A/D Clock Control Register
7018h
SARPINCTRL
SAR A/D Reference and Pin Control Register
701Ah
SARGPOCTRL
SAR A/D GPO Control Register
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
5.16.2 SAR ADC Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-45. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ADC Characteristics
NO.
PARAMETER
CVDD = 1.4 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.05 V
MIN
1
tC(SCLC)
Cycle time, ADC internal conversion clock
3
td(CONV)
Delay time, ADC conversion time
4
SDNL
Static differential non-linearity error (DNL measured for 9 bits)
5
SINL
Static integral non-linearity error
6
Zset
Zero-scale offset error (INL measured for 9 bits)
7
Fset
Full-scale offset error
8
Analog input impedance
9
Signal-to-noise ratio
132
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TYP
UNIT
MAX
2
32tC(SCLC)
±0.6
ns
LSB
±1
1
MHz
LSB
2
LSB
2
LSB
MΩ
54
dB
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.17 Serial Port Interface (SPI)
The device serial port interface (SPI) is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that allows a
serial bit stream of programmed length (1 to 32 bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a
programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI supports multi-chip operation of up to four SPI slave devices. The
SPI can operate as a master device only, slave mode is not supported. Note: The SPI is not supported by
the device DMA controller, so DMA cannot be used in transferring data between the SPI and the on-chip
RAM.
The SPI is normally used for communication between the DSP and external peripherals. Typical
applications include an interface to external I/O or peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers,
display drivers, SPI EEPROMs, and analog-to-digital converters.
The SPI has the following features:
• Programmable divider for serial data clock generation
• Four pin interface (SPI_CLK, SPI_CSn, SPI_RX, and SPI_TX)
• Programmable data length (1 to 32 bits)
• 4 external chip select signals
• Programmable transfer or frame size (1 to 4096 characters)
• Optional interrupt generation on character completion
• Programmable SPI_CSn to SPI_TX delay from 0 to 3 SPI_CLK cycles
• Programmable signal polarities
• Programmable active clock edge
• Internal loopback mode for testing
5.17.1 SPI Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-46 shows the SPI registers.
Table 5-46. SPI Module Registers
CPU
WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
3000h
SPICDR
Clock Divider Register
3001h
SPICCR
Clock Control Register
3002h
SPIDCR1
Device Configuration Register 1
3003h
SPIDCR2
Device Configuration Register 2
3004h
SPICMD1
Command Register 1
3005h
SPICMD2
Command Register 2
3006h
SPISTAT1
Status Register 1
3007h
SPISTAT2
Status Register 2
3008h
SPIDAT1
Data Register 1
3009h
SPIDAT2
Data Register 2
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
133
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.17.2 SPI Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-47. Timing Requirements for SPI Inputs (see Figure 5-38 through Figure 5-41)
CVDD = 1.05 V
NO.
MIN
4
tC(SCLK)
Cycle time, SPI_CLK
5
tw(SCLKH)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high
6
tw(SCLKL)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low
7
tsu(SRXV-SCLK)
8
(1)
(2)
th(SCLK-SRXV)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
66.4 or
4P (1) (2)
40 or
4P (1) (2)
ns
30
19
ns
30
19
ns
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 0
16.1
13.9
ns
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 1
16.1
13.9
ns
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 2
16.1
13.9
ns
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 3
16.1
13.9
ns
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 0
0
0
ns
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 1
0
0
ns
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 2
0
0
ns
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 3
0
0
ns
P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
Table 5-48. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Outputs
(see Figure 5-38 through Figure 5-41)
NO.
1
2
3
(1)
CVDD = 1.05 V
PARAMETER
td(SCLK-STXV)
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid, SPI
Mode 0
-4.2
8.9
-4.9
5.3
ns
Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid, SPI
Mode 1
-4.2
8.9
-4.9
5.3
ns
Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid, SPI
Mode 2
-4.2
8.9
-4.9
5.3
ns
Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid, SPI
Mode 3
-4.2
8.9
-4.9
5.3
ns
tC - 8 + D (1)
ns
td(SPICS-SCLK)
Delay time, SPI_CS active to SPI_CLK active
toh(SCLKI-SPICSI)
Output hold time, SPI_CS inactive to SPI_CLK
inactive
tC - 8 + D (1)
0.5tC - 2.2
0.5tC - 2.2
ns
D is the programable data delay in ns. Data delay can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 SPICLK clock cycles.
4
6
5
SPI_CLK
1
SPI_TX
B0
SPI_RX
B0
2
B1
B1
7
Bn-2
Bn-1
Bn-2
Bn-1
8
3
SPI_CS
A.
B.
Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.
Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.
Figure 5-38. SPI Mode 0 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 0)
134
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
4
6
5
SPI_CLK
1
B0
SPI_TX
B1
SPI_RX
7
2
B1
Bn-2
Bn-1
B1
Bn-2
Bn-1
8
3
SPI_CS
A.
B.
Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.
Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.
Figure 5-39. SPI Mode 1 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 1)
4
5
6
SPI_CLK
1
SPI_TX
SPI_RX
B0
B1
B0
B1
Bn-2
Bn-1
Bn-2
7
2
Bn-1
3
8
SPI_CS
A.
B.
Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.
Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.
Figure 5-40. SPI Mode 2 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 0)
4
5
6
SPI_CLK
1
B0
SPI_TX
B0
SPI_RX
SPI_CS
A.
B.
2
7
B1
Bn-2
Bn-1
B1
Bn-2
Bn-1
8
3
Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.
Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.
Figure 5-41. SPI Mode 3 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 1)
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
135
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.18 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 Controller
The device USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:
• USB2.0 peripheral at speeds high-speed (480 Mb/s) and full-speed (12 Mb/s)
• All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous asynchronous mode)
• 4 Transmit (TX) and 4 Receive (RX) Endpoints in addition to Control Endpoint 0
• FIFO RAM
– 4K endpoint
– Programmable size
• Integrated USB2.0 High Speed PHY
• RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB
The USB2.0 peripheral on this device, does not support:
• Host Mode (Peripheral/Device Modes supported only)
• On-Chip Charge Pump
• On-the-Go (OTG) Mode
136
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.18.1 USB2.0 Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-49 lists of the USB2.0 peripheral registers.
Table 5-49. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers (1)
(1)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
8000h
REVID1
Revision Identification Register 1
8001h
REVID2
Revision Identification Register 2
8004h
CTRLR
Control Register
8008h
STATR
Status Register
800Ch
EMUR
Emulation Register
8010h
MODER1
Mode Register 1
8011h
MODER2
Mode Register 2
8014h
AUTOREQ
8018h
SRPFIXTIME1
SRP Fix Time Register 1
8019h
SRPFIXTIME2
SRP Fix Time Register 2
801Ch
TEARDOWN1
Teardown Register 1
801Dh
TEARDOWN2
Teardown Register 2
8020h
INTSRCR1
USB Interrupt Source Register 1
8021h
INTSRCR2
USB Interrupt Source Register 2
8024h
INTSETR1
USB Interrupt Source Set Register 1
8025h
INTSETR2
USB Interrupt Source Set Register 2
8028h
INTCLRR1
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 1
8029h
INTCLRR2
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 2
802Ch
INTMSKR1
USB Interrupt Mask Register 1
802Dh
INTMSKR2
USB Interrupt Mask Register 2
8030h
INTMSKSETR1
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 1
8031h
INTMSKSETR2
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 2
8034h
INTMSKCLRR1
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 1
8035h
INTMSKCLRR2
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 2
8038h
INTMASKEDR1
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 1
8039h
INTMASKEDR2
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 2
803Ch
EOIR
8040h
INTVECTR1
USB Interrupt Vector Register 1
8041h
INTVECTR2
USB Interrupt Vector Register 2
8050h
GREP1SZR1
Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 1
8051h
GREP1SZR2
Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 2
8054h
GREP2SZR1
Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 1
8055h
GREP2SZR2
Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 2
8058h
GREP3SZR1
Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 1
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Auto Request Register
USB End of Interrupt Register
8059h
GREP3SZR2
Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 2
805Ch
GREP4SZR1
Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 1
805Dh
GREP4SZR2
Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 2
Before reading or writing to the USB registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to "00b" in the USB system control register to enable
word accesses to the USB registers .
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
137
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-49. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
8401h
FADDR_POWER
8402h
INTRTX
Interrupt Register for Endpoint 0 plus Transmit Endpoints 1 to 4
8405h
INTRRX
Interrupt Register for Receive Endpoints 1 to 4
8406h
INTRTXE
Interrupt enable register for INTRTX
8409h
INTRRXE
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRRX
840Ah
INTRUSB_INTRUSBE
840Dh
FRAME
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Common USB Registers
840Eh
Function Address Register, Power Management Register
Interrupt Register for Common USB Interrupts, Interrupt Enable Register
Frame Number Register
INDEX_TESTMODE
Index Register for Selecting the Endpoint Status and Control Registers, Register to
Enable the USB 2.0 Test Modes
TXMAXP_INDX
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to
select Endpoints 1-4)
USB Indexed Registers
8411h
8412h
PERI_CSR0_INDX
PERI_TXCSR_INDX
8415h
8416h
8419h
RXMAXP_INDX
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral Mode. (Index register set to
select Endpoint 0)
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1-4)
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to
select Endpoints 1-4)
PERI_RXCSR_INDX
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1-4)
COUNT0_INDX
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO. (Index register set to select Endpoint
0)
RXCOUNT_INDX
Number of Bytes in Host Receive Endpoint FIFO. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1- 4)
841Ah
-
Reserved
841Dh
-
Reserved
841Eh
CONFIGDATA_INDC
(Upper byte of 841Eh)
8421h
FIFO0R1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 0
8422h
FIFO0R2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 0
8425h
FIFO1R1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 1
8426h
FIFO1R2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 1
8429h
FIFO2R1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 2
Returns details of core configuration. (index register set to select Endpoint 0)
USB FIFO Registers
842Ah
FIFO2R2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 2
842Dh
FIFO3R1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 3
842Eh
FIFO3R2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 3
8431h
FIFO4R1
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 4
8432h
FIFO4R2
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 4
Dynamic FIFO Control Registers
8461h
8462h
138
TXFIFOSZ_RXFIFOSZ
Reserved
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Size, Receive Endpoint FIFO Size (Index register set to
select Endpoints 1-4)
8465h
TXFIFOADDR
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)
8466h
RXFIFOADDR
Receive Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)
846Dh
-
Reserved
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-49. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
8501h
-
8502h
PERI_CSR0
8505h
-
Reserved
8506h
-
Reserved
8509h
COUNT0
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 0
Reserved
Control Status Register for Peripheral Endpoint 0
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO
850Ah
-
Reserved
850Dh
-
Reserved
850Eh
CONFIGDATA
(Upper byte of 850Eh)
8511h
TXMAXP
8512h
PERI_TXCSR
Returns details of core configuration.
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 1
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
8515h
RXMAXP
8516h
PERI_RXCSR
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
8519h
RXCOUNT
851Ah
-
Reserved
851Dh
-
Reserved
851Eh
-
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Number of Bytes in the Receiving Endpoint's FIFO
Reserved
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 2
8521h
TXMAXP
8522h
PERI_TXCSR
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
8525h
RXMAXP
8526h
PERI_RXCSR
8529h
RXCOUNT
852Ah
-
Reserved
852Dh
-
Reserved
852Eh
-
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Reserved
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 3
8531h
TXMAXP
8532h
PERI_TXCSR
8535h
RXMAXP
8536h
PERI_RXCSR
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
8539h
RXCOUNT
853Ah
-
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
Reserved
853Dh
-
Reserved
853Eh
-
Reserved
8541h
TXMAXP
8542h
PERI_TXCSR
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 4
8545h
RXMAXP
8546h
PERI_RXCSR
8549h
RXCOUNT
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO
854Ah
-
Reserved
854Dh
-
Reserved
854Eh
-
Reserved
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
139
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-49. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
9000h
-
Reserved
9001h
-
Reserved
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
CPPI DMA (CMDA) Registers
9004h
TDFDQ
9008h
DMAEMU
CDMA Teardown Free Descriptor Queue Control Register
9800h
TXGCR1[0]
Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1
9801h
TXGCR2[0]
Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2
9808h
RXGCR1[0]
Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1
9809h
RXGCR2[0]
Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2
980Ch
RXHPCR1A[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A
980Dh
RXHPCR2A[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A
9810h
RXHPCR1B[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B
9811h
RXHPCR2B[0]
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B
9820h
TXGCR1[1]
Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1
9821h
TXGCR2[1]
Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2
9828h
RXGCR1[1]
Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1
Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2
CDMA Emulation Control Register
9829h
RXGCR2[1]
982Ch
RXHPCR1A[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A
982Dh
RXHPCR2A[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A
9830h
RXHPCR1B[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B
9831h
RXHPCR2B[1]
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B
9840h
TXGCR1[2]
Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1
9841h
TXGCR2[2]
Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2
9848h
RXGCR1[2]
Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1
9849h
RXGCR2[2]
Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2
984Ch
RXHPCR1A[2]
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A
984Dh
RXHPCR2A[2]
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A
9850h
RXHPCR1B[2]
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B
9851h
RXHPCR2B[2]
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B
9860h
TXGCR1[3]
Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1
9861h
TXGCR2[3]
Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2
9868h
RXGCR1[3]
Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1
9869h
RXGCR2[3]
Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2
986Ch
RXHPCR1A[3]
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A
986Dh
RXHPCR2A[3]
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A
9870h
RXHPCR1B[3]
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B
9871h
RXHPCR2B[3]
A000h
DMA_SCHED_CTRL1
CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1
A001h
DMA_SCHED_CTRL2
CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1
A800h + 4 × N
ENTRYLSW[N]
CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers LSW (N = 0 to 63)
A801h + 4 × N
ENTRYMSW[N]
CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers MSW (N = 0 to 63)
140
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
Table 5-49. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
C000h
-
Reserved
C001h
-
Reserved
C008h
DIVERSION1
Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 1
C009h
DIVERSION2
Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 2
C020h
FDBSC0
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 0
C021h
FDBSC1
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 1
C024h
FDBSC2
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 2
C025h
FDBSC3
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 3
C028h
FDBSC4
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 4
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Queue Manager (QMGR) Registers
C029h
FDBSC5
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 5
C02Ch
FDBSC6
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 6
C02Dh
FDBSC7
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 7
C080h
LRAM0BASE1
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 1
C081h
LRAM0BASE2
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 2
C084h
LRAM0SIZE
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Size Register
C085h
-
C088h
LRAM1BASE1
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 1
C089h
LRAM1BASE2
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 2
C090h
PEND0
Queue Manager Queue Pending 0
C091h
PEND1
Queue Manager Queue Pending 1
C094h
PEND2
Queue Manager Queue Pending 2
C095h
PEND3
Queue Manager Queue Pending 3
C098h
PEND4
Queue Manager Queue Pending 4
C099h
PEND5
Queue Manager Queue Pending 5
D000h + 16 × R
QMEMRBASE1[R]
Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 1 (R = 0 to 15)
D001h + 16 × R
QMEMRBASE2[R]
Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 2 (R = 0 to 15)
D004h + 16 × R
QMEMRCTRL1[R]
Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register (R = 0 to 15)
D005h + 16 × R
QMEMRCTRL2[R]
Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register (R = 0 to 15)
E000h + 16 × N
CTRL1A
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1A (N = 0 to 63)
E001h + 16 × N
CTRL2A
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2A (N = 0 to 63)
E004h + 16 × N
CTRL1B
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1B (N = 0 to 63)
E005h + 16 × N
CTRL2B
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2B (N = 0 to 63)
E008h + 16 × N
CTRL1C
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1C (N = 0 to 63)
E009h + 16 × N
CTRL2C
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2C (N = 0 to 63)
E00Ch + 16 × N
CTRL1D
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1D (N = 0 to 63)
E00Dh + 16 × N
CTRL2D
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2D (N = 0 to 63)
E800h + 16 × N
QSTAT1A
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1A (N = 0 to 63)
E801h + 16 × N
QSTAT2A
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2A (N = 0 to 63)
E804h + 16 × N
QSTAT1B
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1B (N = 0 to 63)
E805h + 16 × N
QSTAT2B
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2B (N = 0 to 63)
E808h + 16 × N
QSTAT1C
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1C (N = 0 to 63)
E809h + 16 × N
QSTAT1C
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2C (N = 0 to 63)
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Reserved
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
141
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.18.2 USB 2.0 Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-50. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB 2.0 (see
Figure 5-42)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
1
PARAMETER
tr(D)
FULL SPEED
12 Mbps
Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (2)
(2)
UNIT
HIGH SPEED
480 Mbps (1)
MIN
MAX
MIN
4
20
0.5
MAX
ns
2
tf(D)
Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals
4
20
0.5
3
trfM
Rise/Fall time, matching (3)
90
111
–
–
%
4
VCRS
Output signal cross-over voltage (2)
1.3
2
–
–
V
160
175
–
–
ns
(4)
7
tw(EOPT)
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter
8
tw(EOPR)
Pulse duration, EOP receiver (4)
9
t(DRATE)
Data Rate
10
ZDRV
Driver Output Resistance
40.5
11
ZINP
Receiver Input Impedance
100k
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
82
ns
–
12
49.5
ns
480
Mb/s
40.5
49.5
Ω
-
-
Ω
For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Revision 2.0, Chapter 7.
Full Speed and High Speed CL = 50 pF
tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]
Must accept as valid EOP
USB_DM
VCRS
USB_DP
tper - tjr
90% VOH
10% VOL
tr
tf
Figure 5-42. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing
142
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.19 General-Purpose Timers
The device has three 32-bit software programmable Timers. Each timer can be used as a generalpurpose (GP) timer. Timer2 can be configured as either a GP or a Watchdog (WD) or both. Generalpurpose timers are typically used to provide interrupts to the CPU to schedule periodic tasks or a delayed
task. A watchdog timer is used to reset the CPU in case it gets into an infinite loop. The GP timers are 32bit timers with a 13-bit prescaler that can divide the CPU clock and uses this scaled value as a reference
clock. These timers can be used to generate periodic interrupts. The Watchdog Timer is a 16-bit counter
with a 16-bit prescaler used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault
condition, such as a non-exiting code loop.
The device Timers support the following:
• 32-bit Programmable Countdown Timer
• 13-bit Prescaler Divider
• Timer Modes:
– 32-bit General-Purpose Timer
– 32-bit Watchdog Timer (Timer2 only)
• Auto Reload Option
• Generates Single Interrupt to CPU (The interrupt is individually latched to determine which timer
triggered the interrupt.)
• Generates Active Low Pulse to the Hardware Reset (Watchdog only)
• Interrupt can be used for DMA Event
5.19.1 Timers Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 5-51 through Table 5-54 show the Timer and Watchdog registers.
Table 5-51. Watchdog Timer Registers (Timer2 only)
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
1880h
WDKCKLK
1882h
WDKICK
Watchdog Kick Register
1884h
WDSVLR
Watchdog Start Value Lock Register
1886h
WDSVR
Watchdog Start Value Register
1888h
WDENLOK
Watchdog Enable Lock Register
188Ah
WDEN
188Ch
WDPSLR
188Eh
WDPS
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
Watchdog Kick Lock Register
Watchdog Enable Register
Watchdog Prescale Lock Register
Watchdog Prescale Register
Table 5-52. General-Purpose Timer 0 Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
1810h
TCR
Timer 0 Control Register
1812h
TIMPRD1
Timer 0 Period Register 1
1813h
TIMPRD2
Timer 0 Period Register 2
1814h
TIMCNT1
Timer 0 Counter Register 1
1815h
TIMCNT2
Timer 0 Counter Register 2
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
143
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-53. General-Purpose Timer 1 Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
1850h
TCR
Timer 1 Control Register
1852h
TIMPRD1
Timer 1 Period Register 1
1853h
TIMPRD2
Timer 1 Period Register 2
1854h
TIMCNT1
Timer 1 Counter Register 1
1855h
TIMCNT2
Timer 1 Counter Register 2
Table 5-54. General-Purpose Timer 2 Registers
CPU WORD
ADDRESS
144
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
1890h
TCR
Timer 2 Control Register
1892h
TIMPRD1
Timer 2 Period Register 1
1893h
TIMPRD2
Timer 2 Period Register 2
1894h
TIMCNT1
Timer 2 Counter Register 1
1895h
TIMCNT2
Timer 2 Counter Register 2
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.20 General-Purpose Input/Output
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
When configured as an output, you can write to an internal register to control the state driven on the
output pin. When configured as an input, you can detect the state of the input by reading the state of the
internal register. The GPIO can also be used to send interrupts to the CPU.
The GPIO peripheral supports the following:
• Up to 26 GPIOs plus 1 general-purpose output (XF) and 4 Special-Purpose Outputs for Use With SAR
• The 26 GPIO pins have internal pulldowns (IPDs) which can be individually disabled
• The 26 GPIOs can be configured to generate edge detected interrupts to the CPU on either the rising
or falling edge
The device GPIO pin functions are multiplexed with various other signals. For more detailed information
on what signals are multiplexed with the GPIO and how to configure them, see Section 2.5, Terminal
Functions and Section 3, Device Configuration of this document.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
145
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.20.1
www.ti.com
General-Purpose Input/Output Peripheral Register Descriptions
The external parallel port interface includes a 16-bit general purpose I/O that can be individually
programmed as input or output with interrupt capability. Control of the general purpose I/O is maintained
through a set of I/O memory-mapped registers shown in Table 5-55.
Table 5-55. GPIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
ACRONYM
1C06h
IODIR1
GPIO Direction Register 1
1C07h
IODIR2
GPIO Direction Register 2
1C08h
IOINDATA1
GPIO Data In Register 1
1C09h
IOINDATA2
GPIO Data In Register 2
1C0Ah
IODATAOUT1
GPIO Data Out Register 1
1C0Bh
IODATAOUT2
GPIO Data Out Register 2
1C0Ch
IOINTEDG1
GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 1
1C0Dh
IOINTEDG2
GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 2
1C0Eh
IOINTEN1
GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 1
1C0Fh
IOINTEN2
GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 2
1C10h
IOINTFLG1
GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 1
1C11h
IOINTFLG2
GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 2
146
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.20.2 GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-56. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (1) (see Figure 5-43)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
MIN
(1)
(2)
1
tw(ACTIVE)
Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse active
2C
(1) (2)
2
tw(INACTIVE)
Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse inactive
C
(1) (2)
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
The pulse width given is sufficient to get latched into the GPIO_IFR register and to generate an interrupt. However, if a user wants to
have the device recognize the GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO Data In (GPIO_DIN) register, the GPIO duration
must be extended to allow the device enough time to access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns.
Table 5-57. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs
(see Figure 5-43)
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
PARAMETER
MIN
3
4
(1)
(2)
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GP[x] output high
Pulse duration, GP[x] output low
UNIT
MAX
3C (1) (2)
ns
(1) (2)
ns
3C
This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.
C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns.
2
GP[x] Input
(With IOINTEDGy = 0)
1
2
GP[x] Input
(With IOINTEDGy = 1)
1
4
3
GP[x] Output
Figure 5-43. GPIO Port Timing
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
147
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
5.20.3 GPIO Peripheral Input Latency Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-58. Timing Requirements for GPIO Input Latency (1)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
MIN
1
(1)
148
tL(GPI)
Latency, GP[x] input
UNIT
MAX
Polling GPIO_DIN register
5
cyc
Polling GPIO_IFR register
7
cyc
Interrupt Detection
8
cyc
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt. However, if a user wants to have the device recognize the GP[x] input
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GP[x] input duration must be extended to allow device enough time to access
the GPIO register through the internal bus.
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
5.21 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
The JTAG interface is used for Boundary-Scan testing and emulation of the device.
TRST should only to be deasserted when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or
exercise the device's boundary scan functionality.
The device includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST will always be
asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly initialized. It is
also recommended that an external pulldown be added to ensure proper device operation when an
emulation or boundary scan JTAG controller is not connected to the JTAG pins. JTAG controllers from
Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG controllers may not drive
TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST. When using this type of JTAG controller,
assert TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally drive TRST high before attempting any
emulation or boundary scan operations. The device will not operate properly if TRST is not asserted low
during powerup.
5.21.1
JTAG ID (JTAGID) Register Descriptions
Table 5-59. JTAG ID Register
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
N/A
ACRONYM
JTAGID
REGISTER NAME
JTAG Identification Register
COMMENTS
Read-only. Provides 32-bit
JTAG ID of the device.
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/Device ID. The
register hex value for the device is: 0x01B8F E02F. For the actual register bit names and their associated
bit field descriptions, see Figure 5-44 and Table 5-60.
31-28
27-12
11-1
0
VARIANT (4-Bit)
PART NUMBER (16-Bit)
MANUFACTURER (11-Bit)
LSB
R-0001
R-1011 1000 1111 1110
R-0000 0010 111
R-1
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset
Figure 5-44. JTAG ID Register Description - Register Value - 0x01B8F E02F
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
149
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Table 5-60. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:28
VARIANT
DESCRIPTION
27:12
PART NUMBER
11:1
MANUFACTURER
0
LSB
Variant (4-Bit) value: 0001.
Part Number (16-Bit) value: 1011 1000 1111 1110.
Manufacturer (11-Bit) value: 0000 0010 111.
LSB. This bit is read as a "1".
5.21.2 JTAG Test_port Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-61. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-45)
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
2
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
60
ns
3
tw(TCKH)
Pulse duration, TCK high
24
ns
4
tw(TCKL)
Pulse duration, TCK low
24
ns
5
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)
Setup time, TDI valid before TCK high
10
ns
6
tsu(TMSV-TCKH)
Setup time, TMS valid before TCK high
6
ns
7
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI valid after TCK high
5
ns
8
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TMS valid after TCK high
4
ns
Table 5-62. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port
(see Figure 5-45)
NO.
CVDD = 1.05 V
CVDD = 1.3 V
CVDD = 1.4 V
PARAMETER
MIN
1
td(TCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
UNIT
MAX
30.5
ns
2
3
4
TCK
1
1
TDO
7
5
TDI
8
6
TMS
Figure 5-45. JTAG Test-Port Timing
150
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
6 Device and Documentation Support
6.1
6.1.1
Device Support
Development Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically
available within the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
The following products support development of TMS320C55x fixed-point DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): Version 3.3 or later
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS™ Version 5.33 or later), which provides the
basic run-time target software needed to support any DSP application.
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
6.1.2
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
DSP devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX,
TMP, or TMS (e.g.,TMS320C5505AZCHA12). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix
designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of
product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production
devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications.
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification.
TMS
Fully-qualified production device.
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product.
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
151
TMS320C5505
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
www.ti.com
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, ZCH), and the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the commercial
temperature range).
Figure 6-1 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any DSP platform member.
TMS 320
PREFIX
TMX = Experimental device
TMS = Qualified device
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320™ DSP family
TECHNOLOGY
C = Dual-supply CMOS
DEVICE
C55x™ DSP: 5505
A.
B.
C
5505
A
ZCH
A
15
DEVICE MAXIMUM OPERATING FREQUENCY
10 = 60 MHz at 1.05 V, 100 MHz at 1.3 V
12 = 75 MHz at 1.05 V, 120 MHz at 1.3 V
15 = 75 MHz at 1.05 V, 150 MHz at 1.4 V
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Blank = –10° C to 70° C, Commercial Temperature
A = –40° C to 85° C, Industrial Temperature
PACKAGE TYPE
ZCH = 196-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-Free
soldered balls [Green]
SILICON REVISION
Revision 2.0
For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com)
The 150 MHz device info is at the “Product Preview (PP)” stage of development for a, not yet, qualified device (TMX)
and the 100-/120-MHz device info is at the “Production Data (PD)” stage of development for qualified devices (TMS).
Figure 6-1. Device Nomenclature
6.2
Community Resources
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;
see TI's Terms of Use.
TI E2E Community TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration
among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas and
help solve problems with fellow engineers.
TI Embedded Processors Wiki Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help
developers get started with Embedded Processors from Texas Instruments and to foster
innovation and growth of general knowledge about the hardware and software surrounding
these devices.
152
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
TMS320C5505
www.ti.com
SPRS660F – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED SEPTEMBER 2013
7 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
The following table shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZCH mechanical package.
7.1
Thermal Data for ZCH
Table 7-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZCH]
°C/W (1)
AIR FLOW
(m/s) (2)
1S0P
6.74
N/A
1S0P
14.5
N/A
2S2P
13.8
1S0P
57.0
2S2P
33.4
NO.
1
RΘJC
2
RΘJB
3
RΘJA
Junction-to-case
Junction-to-board
Junction-to-free air
4
0.00
0.50
5
RΘJMA
6
1.00
Junction-to-moving air
2.00
7
3.00
8
0.09
9
0.00
0.50
10
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
1.00
11
2.00
12
3.00
13
13.7
14
15
0.00
0.50
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
1.00
16
2.00
17
3.00
(1)
(2)
7.2
These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application.
For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment
Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount
Packages.
m/s = meters per second
Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the
designated device. This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5505
153
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
10-Oct-2013
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status
(1)
Package Type Package Pins Package
Drawing
Qty
Eco Plan
Lead/Ball Finish
(2)
MSL Peak Temp
Op Temp (°C)
Device Marking
(3)
(4/5)
TMS320C5505AZCH10
ACTIVE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
168
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-10 to 70
05AZCH10
TMS320C5505AZCH12
ACTIVE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
168
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-10 to 70
05AZCH12
TMS320C5505AZCH15
ACTIVE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
168
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-10 to 70
05AZCH15
TMS320C5505AZCHA10
ACTIVE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
168
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-40 to 85
05AZCHA10
TMS320C5505AZCHA12
ACTIVE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
168
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SNAGCU
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-40 to 85
05AZCHA12
TMX320C5505AZCH15
OBSOLETE
NFBGA
ZCH
196
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
-10 to 70
(1)
The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4)
There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
(5)
Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
Addendum-Page 1
Samples
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
10-Oct-2013
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products
Applications
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Automotive and Transportation
www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Communications and Telecom
www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Computers and Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products
www.dlp.com
Consumer Electronics
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Energy and Lighting
www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers
www.ti.com/clocks
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Interface
interface.ti.com
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
Logic
logic.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Space, Avionics and Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/video
RFID
www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors
www.ti.com/omap
TI E2E Community
e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity
www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Similar pages